Home

Lexmark 47B1002 User's Manual

1. 229 Securing the memory before moving the printer 230 Statement of Volatility 230 Erasing volatile memory 230 Contents 4 Erasing non volatile memory 231 Erasing printer hard disk memory 231 Configuring printer hard disk encryption 232 Maintaining the printer 233 Cleaning the exterior of the printer 233 Cleaning the scanner glass 233 Cleaning the ADF parts
2. 108 Creating an e mail shortcut 109 Contents 3 E mailing a document 110 Customizing e mail settings 111 Canceling an e mail 112 Understanding e mail options 112 Faxing 115 Getting the printer ready to fax 115 Creating shortcuts 120 Sending a fax 121 Customizing fax settings
3. 123 Canceling an outgoing fax 124 Understanding fax options 125 Holding and forwarding faxes 127 Scanning to an FTP address 129 Scanning to an FTP address 129 Creating shortcuts 130 Understanding FTP options 131 Scanning to a computer or flash drive 134 Scanning to a computer 134 Scanning to a flash drive 1
4. 246 Setting up e mail alerts 247 Viewing reports 247 Restoring factory default settings 248 Clearing jams 249 Avoiding jams 249 Understanding jam numbers and locations 249 200 paper jam 251 201 paper jam 251 202 203 paper jams 252 230 paper jam
5. 15 Using the touch screen buttons 16 Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Finding the IP address of the printer 20 Accessing the Embedded Web Server 20 Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 21 Activating the home screen applications 22 Setting up Forms and Favorites 22 Setting up Scan to Network 22 Setting up My MFP 23 Understanding WS Scan 23
6. 253 231 239 paper jams 254 24x paper jam 254 250 paper jam 255 280 289 paper jams 256 290 292 paper jams 257 400 403 and 460 461 paper jams 257 Contents 5 431 438 paper jams 258 455 staple jam 258 Troubleshooting 261 Solving basic printer problems
7. 261 Understanding printer messages 261 Solving printing problems 278 Solving copy problems 281 Solving scanner problems 284 Solving fax problems 286 Solving home screen applications problems 290 Solving option problems 291 Solving paper feed problems 294 Solving print quality problems 295 Solving color quality problems
8. 308 Embedded Web Server does not open 311 Contacting customer support 311 Notices 312 Product information 312 Edition notice 312 Power consumption 317 Index 328 Contents 6 Safety information Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print m
9. 94 Canceling a print job 94 Copying 96 Making copies 96 Copying film photos 97 Copying on specialty media 97 Customizing copy settings 98 Placing information on copies 103 Canceling a copy job 103 Understanding the copy screens and options 104 E mailing 108 Getting ready to e mail
10. 234 Cleaning the printhead lenses 236 Storing supplies 237 Checking the status of supplies 237 Ordering supplies 238 Replacing supplies 240 Moving the printer 244 Administrative support 246 Finding advanced networking and administrator information 246 Using the Embedded Web Server 246 Checking the virtual display 246 Checking the status of the printer
11. Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 185 Menu item Description Overlay Off Confidential Copy Draft Urgent Custom Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay text Note A maximum of 64 characters is allowed Allow priority copies On Off Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document Note On is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Auto Center Off On Lets you automatically center the content on the page Note Off is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Spe
12. Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 USB port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Troubleshooting 273 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs Possible changes include The printer firmware has been updated Paper input options needed for the print job were removed The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model Touch Continue to clear the message 58 Too many bins attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many disks installed 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess disks 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many flash options installed 1 Turn the pri
13. Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Rings to Answer field enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers 4 Click Submit Troubleshooting 288 REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the toner or print cartridge Can receive but not send faxes These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE On the home screen touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY Load the original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial As an alternative dial the telephone number manually Received fax has poor print quality Try one or more of the following RESEND THE DOCUMENT Ask the person who sent you the fax to Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory Resend the fax There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection Increase
14. Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Mac Binary PS Auto On Off Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol ENA Address yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the network address information for an extern
15. Caller ID On Off Alternate Specifies type of caller ID being used Fax number masking Off From left From right Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number Note The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to mask setting Digits to mask 0 58 Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number Understanding printer menus 188 Menu item Description Fax Cover Page Fax Cover Page Off by default On by default Never use Always use Include to field On Off Include from field Off On From Include Message field Off On Message Include Logo Off On Include Footer x Footer x Configures the fax cover page Note Off by default is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options Fax Send Settings Menu item Description Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specifies quality in dots per inch dpi A higher resolution gives greater print quality but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes Note Standard is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 189 Menu item Description Original Size Mixed Sizes Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Specifies the paper size of the document that is being sc
16. NTLM Domain Security menu Editing Security Setups menu Menu item Description Edit Backup Password Creates a backup password Note This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists Edit Building Blocks Edits the Internal Accounts NTLM various Setups Password and PIN Edit Security Templates Adds or edits a Security Template Edit Access Controls Controls access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access points Understanding printer menus 167 Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Menu item Description Login Restrictions Login failures Failure time frame Lockout time Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked out Notes Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 10 attempts is the factory default setting Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting 1indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time Panel Login Timeout specifies h
17. Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Default Settings click E mail FTP Settings 4 Click E mail Settings gt Setup E mail Server 5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 6 Click Submit Configuring e mail settings 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser E mailing 108 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt E mail FTP Settings gt E mail Settings 3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information 4 Click Submit Creating an e mail shortcut Creating an e mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts gt E mail Shortcut Setup 4 Type a unique name for the recipient and then enter the e mail address Note If yo
18. Tray x Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 JIS B5 Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting For trays with automatic size sensing only the size detected by the hardware appears If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job uses the linked tray Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 141 Menu item Description Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray Notes Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays If available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking MP Feeder Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feed
19. 1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message Note If the message is not cleared then replace the defective print cartridge 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 1 Remove the unsupported print cartridge and then install a supported one For instructions on removing a print cartridge touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message 34 Incorrect paper size open src Try one or more of the following Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type Check that the paper size is correctly set For example if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed Cancel the print job 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing To enable Resource Save after receiving this message
20. Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Off On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Off On Corrects slight skew in the scanned image Note Off is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Sharpness 1 5 Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature 4 to 4 Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Use cc bcc Off On Enables the use of the cc and bcc fields Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 203 FTP Settings menu Menu item Description Format PDF pdf Secure PDF pdf TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps Specifies the format of the FTP file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Version 1 5 1
21. Copy gt Advanced Options gt Overlay gt select overlay message gt 4 Touch Copy It Canceling a copy job Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF When the ADF begins processing a document the scanning screen appears To cancel the copy job touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job Copying 103 Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen A Canceling scan job screen appears Once the job is canceled the copy screen appears Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Understanding the copy screens and options Copy from This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document Touch a paper size that matches the original document Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document Copy to This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed Touch the
22. Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin Mail Overflow assigns an overflow bin when the mailbox bins become full Link Optional links together all available exit bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an exit bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an alternate exit bin when a designated bin is full Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 152 Menu item Description Assign Type Bin Plain Paper Bin Card Stock Bin Transparency Bin Recycled Bin Glossy Bin Heavy Glossy Bin Labels Bin Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Envelope Bin Rough Envelope Bin Letterhead Bin Preprinted Bin Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Selects an exit bin for each supported paper type Select from the following options for each type Disabled Standard Bin Bin x Note Disabled is the factory default setting Reports menu Reports menu Menu item Description Menu Settings Page Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other inform
23. Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver Border None Solid Prints a border around each page image Note None is the factory default setting Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Understanding printer menus 213 Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 is the factory default s
24. wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant See your setup documentation for more information The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact your local telephone company For products approved Notices 318 after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point for example 03 is a REN of 0 3 For earlier products the REN is shown separately on the label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may make changes in its
25. Exit from the current screen Understanding the home screen 17 Touch To Tips Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen Other touch screen buttons Touch To Accept Save a setting Cancel Cancel an action or a selection Exit a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes Reset Reset values on the screen Radio button Select or clear an item Features Feature Description Menu trail line Menus gt Settings gt Copy Settings gt Number of Copies A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved then the selection is not saved and it does not become the default setting Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Understanding the home screen 18 Feature Description Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Understanding the home screen 19 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and
26. Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 230 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover 1 2 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 253 231 239 paper jams 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover 1 2 3 Grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the duplex cover 5 Close the side door of the printer 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 24x paper jam Paper jam in Tray 1 1 Open the side door 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 254 Paper jam in the optiona
27. Menu item Description E mail Server Setup Max E mail size 0 65535 KB Specifies the maximum e mail size in kilobytes Note E mails above the specified size are not sent E mail Server Setup Size error message Sends a message when an e mail is greater than the configured size limit E mail Server Setup Limit destinations Specifies a domain name such as a company domain name and then limits e mail destinations to that domain name only Notes E mail can be sent only to the specified domain The limit is one domain E mail Server Setup Web Link Setup Server Login Password Path Base file name Web Link Defines the e mail server path name for example directory path Note The characters lt gt are invalid entries for a path name Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF tif JPEG jpg XPS xps Specifies the format of the scanned file Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Version 1 5 1 6 A 1a 1 2 1 3 1 4 Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e mailing Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for e mailing Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text o
28. Multiple pass Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method Manual Method Single pass Multiple pass Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Notes Single pass is the factory default setting Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only Scheduled Method Single pass Multiple pass Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first Note Single pass is the factory default setting Security Audit Log menu Menu item Description Export Log Enables an authorized user to export the security log Notes To export the log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer From the Embedded Web Server the log can be downloaded to a computer Delete Log Yes No Specifies whether audit logs are deleted Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 170 Menu item Description Configure Log Enable Audit Enable Remote Syslog Remote Syslog Server Remote Sys
29. Print Settings Security Network Ports Help Manage Shortcuts Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Disk Wiping Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Active NIC Standard Network or Network x 1 Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Print All Guides Copy Guide E mail Guide Fax Guide FTP Guide Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide Fax Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Copy Shortcuts Profile Shortcuts Option Card Menu A list of installed download emulators DLEs appears 2 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu appears as Standard Network or Network x 2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding printer menus 138 Supplies menu Menu item Description Replace Supply Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the separator pick assembly and roller Select Yes to reset the supply counter Select No to exit Cyan Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge Magenta Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge Yellow Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the yellow
30. Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Paper Saver Border None Solid Prints a border on each page image Note None is the factory default setting Staple Job Off On Specifies whether prints are stapled Note This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Hole Punch Off On Specifies whether prints have punched holes Note This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a print Notes 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Understanding printer menus 218 Menu item Description Offset Pages None Between Copies Between Jobs Offsets pages at certain instances Notes None is the factory default setting Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off each set of printed pages are offset such as all page 1 s and all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Quality menu Menu item Description Print Mode Color Black Only Specifies whether images are printed in color
31. These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 297 Light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Paper curl Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from th
32. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 32 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board 2 1 1 Plastic pins 2 Metal pins 4 Push the card firmly into place Notes The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board Be careful not to damage the connectors 5 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 33 Installing an Internal Solutions Port The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or co
33. Up section of the Print dialog screen Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document Use the preview feature which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 249 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 62 Print in black and white To print all text and graphics using only the black print cartridge set the printer to Black Only For more information see Printing in black and white on page 87 Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Choose To Off Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is i
34. installing 34 troubleshooting 292 IP address printer finding 20 IPv6 menu 158 J jams avoiding 249 locating jam areas 249 locations 249 numbers 249 jams clearing 200 paper jam 251 201 paper jam 251 202 203 paper jams 252 230 paper jam 253 231 239 paper jams 254 24x paper jam 254 250 paper jam 255 280 289 paper jam 256 280 299 234 290 292 paper jams 257 400 403 paper jams 257 431 438 paper jams 258 455 staple jam 258 460 461 paper jams 257 Job Accounting menu 216 L labels paper tips 91 letterhead copying on 97 Index 331 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 72 loading multipurpose feeder 90 loading trays 90 letterhead printing 90 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 298 light indicator 14 linking exit bins 77 linking exit bins 77 linking trays 76 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 267 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 267 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 267 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 267 Load staples 267 loading 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 72 550 sheet tray standard or optional 69 letterhead in 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 72 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 90 multipurpose feeder 74 loading card stock in multipurpose feeder 74 loading envelopes in multipurpose feeder 74 loading the multipurpose feeder 74 loading the standard tray 69 loading transparencies in multipu
35. order the specified staple cartridge For more information see the illustrations inside the stapler door Part name Part number Staple Cartridges 3 pack Since a pack contains 5 000 staples a 3 pack contains 15 000 staples 25A0013 Ordering an ADF kit Order an ADF kit if you experience problems with paper double feeding or paper failing to feed through the ADF Part name Part number ADF kit 40X7220 Ordering a cleaning kit Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the touch screen Part name Part number Cleaning kit wet and dry wipes 40X0392 Maintaining the printer 239 Replacing supplies Replacing a print cartridge 1 Open the front door 2 Lift the green handle and pull the print cartridge Grasp the top handle and lift the cartridge out of the machine 3 Place the old cartridge in the replacement cartridge shipping box and then attach the return label to the box for shipping Maintaining the printer 240 4 Unpack a new print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 1 2 5 Shake the new cartridge front to back and side to side to evenly distribute the toner Maintaining the printer 241 6 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge 7 Insert the new cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back in place Note Make sure
36. white streaks on a page 304 print troubleshooting error reading flash drive 278 held jobs do not print 279 incorrect characters print 280 incorrect margins 297 jammed pages are not reprinted 294 job prints from wrong tray 280 job prints on wrong paper 280 jobs do not print 278 Large jobs do not collate 281 multiple language PDF files do not print 278 paper curl 298 paper frequently jams 294 print job takes longer than expected 280 tray linking does not work 280 unexpected page breaks occur 281 printer configurations 11 finishing features 84 minimum clearances 10 moving 10 244 245 selecting a location 10 shipping 245 printer configurations 11 printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 65 factory defaults restoring 248 printer hard disk disposing of 230 encrypting 232 installing 38 removing 43 troubleshooting 292 wiping 231 printer hard disk encryption 232 printer hard disk memory erasing 231 Index 333 printer information where to find 9 printer IP address finding 20 printer messages 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 278 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 270 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 270 34 Incorrect paper size open src 270 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 270 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 271 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 271 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 271
37. 2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears 3 Touch Submit Troubleshooting 294 Solving print quality problems If these suggestions do not correct the problem then contact customer support You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement Characters have jagged or uneven edges If you are using downloaded fonts verify that the fonts are supported by the printer the host computer and the software program Clipped images Try one or more of the following CHECK THE GUIDES Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Size setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages You may notice fine horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode To fix this set Quiet Mode to Off Image Photo Troubleshooting 295 Shadow images appear on prints Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded
38. 6 A 1a 1 2 1 3 1 4 Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Type Text Graphics Text Photo Photo Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies how content will be produced Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original
39. ABCDE ABCDE MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Solving color quality problems FAQ about color printing What is RGB color Red green and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example red and green can be combined to create yellow Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red green or blue needed to produce a certain color What is CMYK color Cyan magenta yellow and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature For example cyan and yellow can be combined to create green Printing presses inkjet printers and color laser printers create colors in this manner CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan magenta yellow and black needed to reproduce a particular color How is color specified in a document to be printed Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations Additionally they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document For more information see the software program Help topics How does the printer know what color to print When a user prints a document information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the print
40. Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your origi
41. Continue to clear the message Complete the Fax Server setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Name not set up The Fax Station Name has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Fax Station Number not set up The Fax Station Number has not been entered Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Complete the Analog Fax Setup If the message appears again contact your system support person Troubleshooting 264 Install bin x Try one or more of the following Install the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Install Tray x Try one or more of the following Install the specified tray 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Insert the hole punch box Insert the
42. Embedded Web Server 246 network setup page printing 48 Networking Guide where to find 246 noise emission levels 315 non volatile memory 230 erasing 231 notices 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 O options 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 45 550 sheet tray installing 45 fax card 25 firmware card 32 firmware cards 25 flash memory card 32 Internal Solutions Port installing 34 memory card installing 30 memory cards 25 network 25 order of installation 44 ports 25 printer hard disk installing 38 printer hard disk removing 43 updating in printer driver 49 Index 332 options touch screen copy 104 105 106 107 132 e mail 112 113 114 fax 125 126 FTP 131 132 133 scan 136 scan to computer 136 137 ordering cleaning kit 239 fuser or transfer module 238 print cartridges 238 staple cartridges 239 waste toner bottle 239 ordering a print cartridge 238 output file type changing 111 P paper characteristics 79 different sizes copying 99 letterhead 80 preprinted forms 80 recycled 80 saving 102 selecting 80 storing 82 unacceptable 80 Universal Paper Size 151 Universal size setting 68 using recycled 62 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 294 paper jams avoiding 249 paper jams clearing 200 paper jam 251 201 paper jam 251 202 203 paper jams 252 230 paper jam 253 231 239 paper jams 254 24x paper jam 254 250 paper jam 255 280 289
43. Job This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log E mailing 114 Faxing Note Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Getting the printer ready to fax The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions Note During the initial printer setup deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later and then touch Continue The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Warning Potential Damage Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax I
44. List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer Holding Faxes Held Fax Mode Off Always On Manual Scheduled Fax Holding Schedule Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule Note Off is the factory default setting Enable Color Fax Receive On Off Enables the device to receive fax in color Understanding printer menus 194 Fax Log Settings Menu item Description Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job Receive Error Log Print Never Print on Error Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error Auto Print Logs On Off Enables automatic printing of fax logs Note Logs print after every 200 jobs Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs Logs Display Remote Fax Name or Remote Station Name Dialed Number Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned Enable Job Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Job log Enable Call Log On Off Enables access to the Fax Call log Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed Speaker Settings Menu item Description Speaker Mode On until Connected Always On Always Off Specifies the mode of the speaker Notes On until Connected is the factory default se
45. Mac OS X version 10 5 or later a From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click c If necessary click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner d Click the IP tab e Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities b Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center c From the printer list click Add and then click IP Printer d Type the scanner IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 or earlier In Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select your printer gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 or earlier a From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities b Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center c From the printer list click Add d Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers e From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk f From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone g Select the device from the list and then click Add Note If the scanner does not show up in the list then you m
46. Name not set up 264 Fax Station Number not set up 264 fax troubleshooting caller ID is not shown 286 can receive but not send faxes 289 can send but not receive faxes 288 cannot send or receive a fax 287 received fax has poor print quality 289 faxing blocking junk faxes 124 canceling a fax job 124 125 changing resolution 123 choosing a fax connection 116 configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 120 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 120 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 121 Index 330 distinctive ring service 118 fax setup 115 forwarding faxes 127 holding faxes 127 making a fax lighter or darker 123 sending a fax 121 sending a fax at a scheduled time 123 sending using the touch screen 121 setting the date and time 119 setting the fax number or station number 119 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 119 viewing a fax log 124 FCC notices 314 318 322 finding more information about the printer 9 finding printer IP address 20 finisher finishing features 84 supported paper sizes 84 finisher features 84 Finishing menu 217 firmware card installing 32 flash drive printing from 88 Flash Drive menu 208 flash drives supported file types 90 flash memory card installing 32 troubleshooting 292 font sample list printing 94 Forms and Favorites setting up 22 forwarding faxes 127 FTP scanning using address book 130 FTP address creating shortcuts using the touch screen 131 FT
47. Note Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers Printing 90 Tips on using transparencies Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only From the Paper menu set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230 C 446 F without melting discoloring offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions To prevent print quality problems avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies Before loading transparencies flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together We recommend Lexmark transparencies For ordering information see the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Tips on using envelopes Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220 C 446 F without sealing wrinkling curling excessively or releasing hazardous emissions For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m2 24 lb bond paper or 25 cotton All cotton envelopes must not exceed 70 g m2 20 lb bond weight Use only new envelop
48. Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status On Off Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes On is the factory default setting Off disables parallel port negotiation Protocol Fastbytes Standard Specifies the parallel port protocol Notes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Off On Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computer Notes Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Parallel Mode 2 On Off Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Mac Binary PS Auto On Off Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default set
49. Paper Saver is also called N up printing The N stands for Number For example 2 up would print two pages of your document on a single page and 4 up would print four pages of your document on a single page Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page Separator Sheets Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies pages or print jobs The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on Copying 106 Save As Shortcut This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number Copying 107 E mailing ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings You can use the printer to e mail scanned documents to one or more recipients There are three ways to send an e mail from the printer You can type the e mail address use a shortcut number or use the address book Getting ready to e mail Setting up the e mail function 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu
50. Publishing color output Euro CMYK Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting Off No color correction is implemented How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo From the printer Quality menu nine types of Color Samples sets are available These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server Selecting any sample set generates a multiple page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box depending on the table selected The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table By examining Color Samples sets a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program For more information see the software program Help topics Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used Auto Off or Manual the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified
51. Setting up Remote Operator Panel 23 Additional printer setup 25 Installing internal options 25 Order of installation 44 Installing optional trays 45 Attaching cables 46 Verifying printer setup 47 Setting up the printer software 48 Setting up wireless printing 50 Installing the printer on an Ethernet network 55 Changing port settings after i
52. THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS When patterns moir appear in the output On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt lower the Sharpness setting On the Copy screen make sure no scaling is being selected When the text is light or disappearing From the Copy screen navigate to Content gt Text gt gt select the appropriate source for the original document being copied gt From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Sharpness gt increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal and then reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Contrast gt increase the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting When the output appears washed out or overexposed On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned From the Copy screen adjust the Darkness setti
53. a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Screen Timeout 15 300 sec Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning to a Ready state Note 30 sec is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 178 Menu item Description Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 1 255 sec Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the print job Notes 90 sec is the factory default setting When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Timeouts Wait Timeout 15 65535 sec Disabled Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes 40 sec is the factory default setting Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 sec Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jo
54. active embedded applications Some applications are supported only on select printer models There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address From the top left corner of the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Showing or hiding icons on the home screen 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt General Se
55. and 460 461 paper jams 1 Open the paper transport unit door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the paper transport unit door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 257 431 438 paper jams 1 Push down the button to slide the output finisher to the right 2 1 2 Open the finisher door and then removed the jammed paper Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the finisher door 4 Slide the finisher back until it clicks in place 5 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 455 staple jam 1 Press the latch to open the stapler door Note The stapler door is located behind the finisher Clearing jams 258 2 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer 1 2 3 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any jammed or loose staples Clearing jams 259 4 Close the staple guard 5 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place 6 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place 7 Close the stapler door 8 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 260 Troubleshooting Solving basic printer problems If there are basic printer problems or
56. as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10 2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc 6 From the Embedded Web Server navigate to the location of the wireless settings information Additional printer setup 53 Configure the printer for wireless access 1 Type the network name SSID in the appropriate field 2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point wireless router 3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network 4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network 5 Click Submit 6 Open the AirPort application on the computer In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Network gt Wi Fi System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 7 From the Network pop up menu select the name of the wireless network Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly To print on a network printer each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 1 Install a printer driver file on the computer a Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support
57. as the default for all print jobs Notes 1 sided is the factory default setting You can set 2 sided printing from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes Long Edge is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies 1 999 Specifies the default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Do Not Print Print Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Notes On is the factory default setting On stacks the print job in sequence Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted Notes Off
58. browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Reports and then click the type of report you want to view Administrative support 247 Restoring factory default settings If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Administrative support 248 Clearing jams By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly you can avoid most jams If jams do occur follow the steps outlined in this section To clear a jam message and resume printing clear the entire paper path and then touch Continue jam cleared If Jam Recovery is set to On then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed If Jam Recovery is set to Auto then the
59. cartridge of the color with the repeating defect if the print defects occur in the following instances in every 37 7 mm 1 48 in of the page in every 41 6 mm 1 64 in of the page in every 42 7 mm 1 68 in of the page in every 94 3 mm 3 71 in of the page REPLACE THE FUSER Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances in every 95 0 mm 3 74 in of the page in every 146 7 mm 5 78 in of the page Troubleshooting 302 Skewed print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack CHECK THE PAPER Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications Solid color or black pages appear on prints MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER Remove the print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Reinsert the print cartridges Note If the quality does not improve replace the print cartridges If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Troubleshooti
60. cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Notices 326 Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for T
61. color adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION The software program or application may have specified an off white background Toner rubs off These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy If necessary change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu Troubleshooting 306 THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser Toner specks These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the defective or worn cartridges THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Contact Customer Support Transparency print quality is poor Try one or more of the following CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Troubleshooting 307 Uneven print density ABCDE
62. component notice This product may contain the following modular component s Lexmark regulatory type model LEX M01 003 FCC ID IYLM01003 IC 2376A M01003 Licensing notices The following documents can be viewed from the installation software CD Directory File CD LEGAL FW_License pdf mDNS tar gz Expat txt Inst_lib txt Instgui txt Instgui zip Notices 314 Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 53 dBA Ready 35 dBA Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number Battery notice This product contains Perchlorate material Special handling may apply For more information go to http www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer Notices 315 ENERG
63. connected to a wireless network The Wireless menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Wireless Menu item Description WPS PBC Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router within a given period of time WPS PIN Mode Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point WPS Auto Detect Disable Enable Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with WPS uses WPS Push Button Configuration PBC or WPS Personal Identification Number PIN Note Disable is the factory default setting Network Mode Ad hoc Infrastructure Specifies the network mode Notes Ad hoc is the factory default setting This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point Compatibility 802 11b g n 802 11n 802 11b g Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network Note The 802 11b g n is the factory default setting Choose Network list of available networks Lets you select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection View Security Mode Lets
64. facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service If you experience trouble with this equipment for repair or warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc at www lexmark com or your Lexmark representative If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved This equipment contains no user serviceable parts For repair and warranty information contact Lexmark International Inc See the previous paragraph for contact information Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment consult your telephone company or a qualified installer Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer in
65. following Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task Note Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the memory before moving the printer 231 Configuring printer hard disk encryption Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen Using the Embedded Web Server 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 2 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk Disk encryption can take from several min
66. from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Scanning to an FTP address 132 Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Negative Image Mirror Image Scan edge to edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature image output settings before sending the image file Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Scanning to an FTP address
67. is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 147 Menu item Description Rough Envelope Weight Heavy Light Normal Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Note Heavy is the factory default setting Letterhead Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Preprinted Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Colored Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Light Weight Light Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Note Light is the factory default setting Heavy Weight Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded Note Heavy is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Custom x Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded Notes Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Paper Loading menu Menu item Description Card Stock Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper
68. lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system b Double click the installer package for the printer c Follow the instructions on the computer screen d Select a destination and then click Continue e From the Easy Install screen click Install f Type the user password and then click OK All necessary applications are installed in the computer g Click Close when the installation is complete 2 Add the printer a For IP printing In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax Additional printer setup 54 2 Click 3 If necessary click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner 4 Click the IP tab 5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List choose Add and then click IP Printer 4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field and then click Add b For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 or earlier In Mac OS X version 10 5 1 From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp
69. more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings as needed Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Printing in black and white From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Print Mode gt Black Only gt Submit Adjusting toner darkness 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Printing 87 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness setting 4 Click Submit Printing from a mobile device For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application visit http lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Printing from a flash drive Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file enter the file password from the printer control panel You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive in
70. not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Notices 325 Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guid
71. of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 E p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark International Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b el r sainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b ti
72. operating mode When operating in Hibernate mode the printer is essentially off and all other systems and devices are powered down safely Note The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Sleep Button Settings 3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop down select Hibernate 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button gt Hibernate 2 Touch Submit Adjusting the brightness of the display To save energy or if you have trouble reading your display then adjust the brightness of the display Available settings range from 20 100 The factory default setting is 100 Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a ne
73. or in black and white Note Color is the factory default setting Color Correction Auto Off Manual Adjusts the color output on the printed page Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page Off turns off color correction Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page Print Resolution 4800 CQ 1200 dpi Specifies the printed output resolution Note 4800 CQ is the factory default setting Toner Darkness 1 5 Lightens or darkens the printed output Notes 4 is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner If Print Mode is set to Black Only then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs If Print Mode is set to Color then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4 Understanding printer menus 219 Menu item Description Enhance Fine Lines Off On Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical circuit diagrams and flow charts Notes Off is the factory default setting You can set this option from the software program For Windows users click File gt Print gt Properti
74. other computers on the network to use the wireless printer see the Networking Guide Installing the printer on a wireless network Macintosh Note Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network Prepare to configure the printer 1 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Additional printer setup 52 1 2 2 Locate the printer MAC address a From the printer control panel navigate to gt Reports gt gt Network Setup Page gt or gt Reports gt Network Setup Page b In the Standard Network Card section look for UAA MAC Note You will need this information later Enter the printer information 1 Access the AirPort options In Mac OS X version 10 5 or later From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Network gt Wi Fi System Preferences gt Network gt AirPort In Mac OS X version 10 4 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Internet Connect gt AirPort 2 From the Network Name pop up menu select print server yyyyyy where the y s are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet 3 Open a Web browser 4 From the Bookmarks menu select Show or Show All Bookmarks 5 Under COLLECTIONS select Bonjour or Rendezvous and then double click the printer name Note The application referred to
75. paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge Print is too light Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES Troubleshooting 300 CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting For Windows users check this setting from Print Properties For Macintosh users check this setting from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to
76. paper size and type that matches the paper loaded If the settings for Copy from and Copy to are different then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays then touch Manual Feeder and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder When Copy to is set to Auto Size Match each copy matches the paper size of the original document If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder Copies This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed Copying 104 Scale This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25 and 400 Scale can also be set for you automatically When you want to copy from one size of paper to another such as from legal size to letter size paper setting the Copy from and Copy to paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1 touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1 Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate Darkness This option adjusts how light or da
77. possible on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support Note To use a paper size that is unlisted configure a Universal Paper Size Supported paper sizes Measurements apply to simplex one sided printing only For duplex two sided printing the minimum size is 139 7 x 210 mm 5 50 x 8 27 in Paper size Dimensions Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Optional 550 sheet tray Optional 2 000 sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplexer A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in X A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 in X X X X JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 1 in X Letter 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x 11 in Legal 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 2 x 266 7 mm 7 25 x 10 5 in X Oficio M xico 215 9 x 340 4 mm 8 5 x 13 4 in X 1 Supported by X790 models only 2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application Paper and specialty media guidelines 82 Paper size Dimensions Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Optional 550 sheet tray Optional 2 000 sheet tray
78. printer MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them Troubleshooting 279 Print job takes longer than expected Try one or more of the following REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Eliminate the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Page Protect gt Off gt CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS When using Eco Mode or Quiet Mode settings you may notice a reduction in performance Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type setting 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct type setting For Windows users specify the type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the type from the Print dialog Incorrect characters print Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode If Ready Hex appears on the display you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus Tray l
79. printer control panel each time you want to send a fax you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Manage Shortcuts gt Fax Shortcut Setup Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then enter the fax number To create a multiple number shortcut enter the fax numbers for the group Note Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon 4 Assign a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 5 Click Add Faxing 120 Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a d
80. printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin Print without the scanner or contact your system support person 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it Try one or more of the following 1 Remove all pages from the ADF 2 Turn the printer off 3 Wait for 15 seconds and then turn the printer on Note If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message then touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen and then contact your system support person 4 Place the document in the ADF and then adjust the paper guides 5 From the home screen touch Copy or use the keypad to enter the number of copies 6 Change the copy settings as needed 7 Touch Copy It Troubleshooting 277 1565 Emulation error load emulation option The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card To fix this download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com Solving printing problems Multiple language PDF files do not print The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts 1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat 2 Click the printer icon gt Advanced gt Print as image g
81. printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 Image Smoothing Off On Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low resolution images and smooths their color transitions Notes Off is the factory default setting Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution PCL Emul menu Menu item Description Font Source Resident Disk Download Flash All Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item Notes Resident is the factory default setting It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in RAM Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM All shows all fonts available to any option Understanding printer menus 224 Menu item Description Font Name RO Courier Identifies a specific font and where it is stored Note RO Courier is the factory default setting The RO Courier format shows the font name font ID and storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Symbol Set 10U PC 8 12U PC 850 Specifies the symbol set for each font name Notes 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the internati
82. printer software Installing the printer software Notes If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software then uninstall the current software first Close all open software programs before installing the printer software 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 2 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK In Macintosh Click the CD icon on the desktop Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Additional printer setup 48 Updating available options in the printer driver When any hardware options are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for use For Wind
83. refill change cartridge 271 400 403 paper jams 257 431 438 paper jams 258 455 staple jam 258 460 461 paper jams 257 51 Defective flash detected 272 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 272 53 Unformatted flash detected 272 54 Network x software error 272 54 Serial option x error 272 54 Standard network software error 272 55 Unsupported option in slot x 273 550 sheet tray installing 45 550 sheet tray standard or optional loading 69 56 Parallel port x disabled 273 56 Serial port x disabled 273 56 Standard parallel port disabled 273 56 Standard USB port disabled 273 56 USB port x disabled 273 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 274 58 Input config error 275 58 Too many bins attached 274 58 Too many disks installed 274 58 Too many flash options installed 274 58 Too many trays attached 274 59 Incompatible output bin x 275 61 Remove defective disk 275 62 Disk full 275 80 xx Fuser life warning 275 80 xx Fuser missing 276 80 xx Fuser near life warning 275 80 xx Replace fuser 276 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 276 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 276 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 276 83 xx Replace transfer module 276 83 xx Transfer module life warning 276 83 xx Transfer module missing 276 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 277 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 277 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 277 88 x
84. selected by the PCL 5e interpreter 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T2 Default 4 T3 Default 5 T4 Default 20 T5 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray drawer or feeder Understanding printer menus 226 Menu item Description Tray Renumber Restore Defaults Yes No Returns all tray drawer and feeder assignments to the factory default settings HTML menu Menu Item Description Font Name Albertus MT Antique Olive Apple Chancery Arial MT Avant Garde Bodoni Bookman Chicago Clarendon Cooper Black Copperplate Coronet Courier Eurostile Garamond Geneva Gill Sans Goudy Helvetica Hoefler Text Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Joanna MT Letter Gothic Lubalin Graph Marigold MonaLisa Recut Monaco New CenturySbk New York Optima Oxford Palatino StempelGaramond Taffy Times TimesNewRoman Univers Zapf Chancery NewSansMTCS NewSansMTCT New SansMTJA NewSansMTKO Sets the default font for HTML documents Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font Menu item Description Font Size 1 255 pt Sets the default font size for HTML documents Notes 12 pt is the factory default setting Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Understanding printer menus 227 Menu
85. sheet tray Tray 1 and may have one or more optional 550 sheet trays All 550 sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out Notice the size indicators on the bottom of the tray Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides LTR LGL A4 A4 LTR LGL Loading paper and specialty media 69 2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading 3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading Note The length guide has a locking device To unlock push the button on top of the length guide backward To lock push the button forward when a length has been selected 3 2 1 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup Notes Place the print side facedown for duplex printing Loading paper and specialty media 70 Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing Make
86. shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin 3 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents as they may damage the finish of the printer 4 Wipe only the outside of the printer making sure to include the standard exit bin Warning Potential Damage Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer 5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job Cleaning the scanner glass Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems such as streaks on copied or scanned images 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the scanner cover 1 2 3 4 1 White underside of the ADF cover 2 White underside of the scanner cover Maintaining the printer 233 3 Scanner glass 4 ADF glass 3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry 4 Open the bottom ADF door 2 1 5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door 6 Close the bottom ADF door 7 Close the scanner cover Cleaning the ADF parts Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 280 299 paper jam messages 1 Turn the printe
87. side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the print cartridge If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the defective print cartridge Printer is printing blank pages Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed Reinstall the cartridge Troubleshooting 301 MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges 1 Remove the cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge Note If print quality does not improve then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing If the problem continues then the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Repeating defects appear on prints Try one or more of the following REPLACE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the print
88. sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstr len GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasers teelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden laser laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersug rz s fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a z r szerkezet felbont sakor Ker lje a l zersug rnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare
89. size and quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 201 Menu item Description E mail images sent as Attachment Web Link Specifies how the images will be sent Note Attachment is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to e mail job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether or not the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for printing e mail logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an exit bin for e mail logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only a
90. size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near Full Action Note 5MB is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Action None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full Notes None is the factory default setting The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Disk Full Action None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs Understanding printer menus 216 Menu item Description E mail Address to Send Logs Specifies the e mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs Log File Prefix Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log file prefix Finishing menu Menu item Description Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Specifies whether duplex 2 sided printing is set
91. sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage 6 Insert the tray 7 From the printer control panel verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded Loading paper and specialty media 71 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feeder The high capacity feeder can hold up to 2 000 sheets of A4 letter or legal size paper 80 g m2 or 20 lb CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed 1 Pull the tray out 2 Adjust the width guide as necessary 1 2 3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 72 4 Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup ABC Note Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray Overloading the tray can cause paper jams Notes Place pre punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing 5 Insert the tray Loading paper and specialty media 73 Loading the multipurpose feeder Th
92. table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Mode Description Power consumption Watts Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs 1000 W Copy The product is generating hard copy output from hard copy original documents 1050 W Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents 115 W Ready The product is waiting for a print job 70 W Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 17 W Hibernate The product is in a low level energy saving mode 0 75 W Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet but the power switch is turned off 0 W The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 30 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeou
93. the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy using products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kf
94. the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The device status shows the following Paper tray settings Level of toner in the print cartridge Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit Capacity measurements of certain printer parts Setting up e mail alerts Configure the printer to send you e mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added or when there is a paper jam 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings 3 Under Other Settings click E mail Alert Setup 4 Select the items for notification and type the e mail addresses 5 Click Submit Note For information on setting up the e mail server contact your system support person Viewing reports You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer the network and supplies To view reports from a network printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web
95. the cartridge is fully pushed in 8 Close the front door Maintaining the printer 242 Replacing the waste toner bottle Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle appears The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced 1 Remove the replacement waste toner bottle from its shipping box and then unpack it 2 1 2 Open the printer front door and then open tray 1 3 Pull the green tabs sideways and then grasp and pull the tabs with both hands to remove the waste toner bottle 1 2 1 4 Place the waste toner bottle in the recycling bag 5 Place the bag into the shipping box you removed the replacement part from 2 1 Maintaining the printer 243 6 Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box 1 2 7 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer 2 2 1 8 Close tray 1 and then close the front door Moving the printer Before moving the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 lb and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off of the optional drawe
96. the factory default setting Separator Sheets None Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages Places a sheet of paper between pages copies or jobs Note None is the factory default setting Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the separator sheet source Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job Note 5 is the factory default setting Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy job Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed Understanding printer menus 183 Menu item Description Number of Copies 1 999 Specifies the number of copies for the copy job Note 1 is the factory default setting Header Footer Top left Top left Off Date Time Page number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the top left of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting for Top left All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top middle Top middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the middle of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting fo
97. the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Modular
98. the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Add the printer For IP printing a From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click c Click the IP tab d Type the printer IP address in the address field and then click Add For AppleTalk printing Notes Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10 5 a From the Apple menu navigate to System Preferences gt Print amp Fax b Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer gt Add Setting up serial printing Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the printer or to print at a reduced speed After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary c Save the modified settings and then print a menu settings page Additional printer setup 59 2 In
99. the printer is unresponsive make sure The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working The printer is turned on Check the printer power switch The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device All options are properly installed The printer driver settings are correct Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on This often fixes the problem Understanding printer messages Adjusting color Wait for the process to complete An error has occurred with the USB drive Please remove and reinsert drive Try one or more of the following Remove and reinsert the flash drive If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacement Change paper source to custom type name Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu
100. toner cartridge Black Cartridge Early Warning Invalid Critically Low Missing Defective OK Unsupported Shows the status of the black toner cartridge Separator Pick Assembly and Roller OK Replace Shows the status of the separator pick assembly and roller Understanding printer menus 139 Menu item Description Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the waste toner bottle Fuser Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the fuser Transfer Module Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the transfer module Staple Cartridge Early Warning Low Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the staple cartridge Hole Punch Box Near Full Replace Missing OK Shows the status of the hole punch box Understanding printer menus 140 Paper menu Default Source menu Menu item Description Default Source Tray x MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray Paper Size Type menu Menu item Description
101. use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Menu item Description Wiping Mode Auto Manual Off Specifies the mode for disk wiping Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer determines when to initiate a disk wipe Scheduled Wiping Time Day Sets the schedule for disk wiping Notes Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping Values are Sunday to Friday Everyday Weekdays and Weekends Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it Understanding printer menus 169 Menu item Description Manual Wiping Do not start now Start now Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed printed This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job Notes Do not start now is the factory default setting If the Disk Wiping access control is activated then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe Automatic Method Single pass
102. uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Auto On Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the size of the parallel input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 162 Menu item Description Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes
103. your CD or DVD drive 3 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen Note To configure the printer using a static IP address IPv6 or scripts select Advanced Options gt Administrator Tools 4 Select Ethernet connection and then click Continue 5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so 6 Select the printer from the list and then click Continue Note If the configured printer does not appear in the list then click Modify Search 7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen For Macintosh users 1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer 2 Obtain the printer IP address either From the printer control panel From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer 3 Install the printer driver on the computer a Double click the installer package for the printer b Follow the instructions on the computer screen c Select a destination and then click Continue d From the Easy Install screen click Install e Type the user password and then click OK All the necessary applications are installed on the computer f Click Close when the installation is complete 4 Add the printer For IP printing Additional printer setup 56 In
104. 133 Scanning to a computer or flash drive ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer Scanning to a computer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Scan Profile gt Create 3 Select your scan settings and then click Next 4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file 5 Enter a scan name The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display 6 Click Submit 7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your docum
105. 3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 2 3 4 1 Memory card connector 2 Firmware and flash memory card connectors 3 Internal print server connector 4 Hard disk connector Additional printer setup 28 4 Reattach the system board cover Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors a Reinstall the hooks on the left side of the metal panel into the slots on the system board cage and then shift to the right Additional printer setup 29 b Align and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten c Close the cover Installing a memory card CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch s
106. 35 Using the ScanBack Utility 135 Understanding scan profile options 136 Understanding printer menus 138 Menus list 138 Supplies menu 139 Paper menu 141 Reports menu 153 Network Ports menu 154 Security menu 167 Settings menu 172 Help menu
107. 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 271 38 Memory full 271 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 271 40 color invalid refill change cartridge 271 51 Defective flash detected 272 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 272 53 Unformatted flash detected 272 54 Network x software error 272 54 Serial option x error 272 54 Standard network software error 272 55 Unsupported option in slot x 273 56 Parallel port x disabled 273 56 Serial port x disabled 273 56 Standard parallel port disabled 273 56 Standard USB port disabled 273 56 USB port x disabled 273 57 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 274 58 Input config error 275 58 Too many bins attached 274 58 Too many disks installed 274 58 Too many flash options installed 274 58 Too many trays attached 274 59 Incompatible output bin x 275 61 Remove defective disk 275 62 Disk full 275 80 xx Fuser life warning 275 80 xx Fuser missing 276 80 xx Fuser near life warning 275 80 xx Replace fuser 276 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 276 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing 276 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 276 83 xx Replace transfer module 276 83 xx Transfer module life warning 276 83 xx Transfer module missing 276 840 01 Scanner disabled by admin 277 840 02 Scanner disabled Contact system administrator if problem persists 277 88 xx Color cartridge critically low 277 88 xx color cartridge lo
108. 67 Memory full cannot print faxes 267 Reattach bin x 268 Reattach bin x y 268 Remove packaging material area name 269 Remove paper from linked set bin name 269 Remove paper from all bins 269 Remove paper from bin x 269 Remove paper from standard output bin 269 Index 334 Restore held jobs 269 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 269 Slide finisher to the left 269 Some held jobs were not restored 269 Supply needed to complete job 269 Tray x paper size unsupported 270 Unsupported disk 270 Unsupported USB device please remove 264 printer options troubleshooting 2 000 sheet drawer problems 292 cannot detect flash memory card 292 cannot detect printer hard disk 292 internal print server 293 Internal Solutions Port 292 memory card 293 option does not work 291 paper tray problems 291 USB parallel interface card 293 printer problems solving basic 261 printer software installing Windows 48 printhead lenses cleaning 236 printing black and white 87 canceling from the printer control panel 94 directory list 94 font sample list 94 from a mobile device 88 from flash drive 88 from Macintosh 87 from Windows 87 menu settings page 47 network setup page 48 on letterhead 90 printing a directory list 94 printing a document 87 printing a font sample list 94 printing a menu settings page 47 printing a network setup page 48 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 93 from W
109. Content Type Text Photo Text Graphics Photo Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies the source of content in the copy job Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color On Off Specifies whether or not copi
110. Cover Page Setup Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Header Footer Use to turn on Date Time Page number Bates number or Custom text and prints them in the specified header or footer location Margin Shift Use to increase the size of the margin of an specified distance by shifting the scanned image This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole punch copies Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want If the additional margin is too large then the copy will be cropped Overlay Use to create a watermark or message that overlays the content of your copy You can choose between Urgent Confidential Copy and Draft or you can enter a custom message in the Enter custom text field The word you pick will appear faintly in large print across each page Note A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person When a custom overlay is created a button with an icon of that overlay will be available Paper Saver Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page
111. Fax 2 Click and then navigate to AppleTalk gt select the printer from the list gt Add In Mac OS X version 10 4 1 From the Finder navigate to Applications gt Utilities 2 Double click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center 3 From the Printer List click Add 4 Click Default Browser tab gt More Printers 5 From the first pop up menu select AppleTalk 6 From the second pop up menu select Local AppleTalk Zone 7 Select the printer from the list and then click Add Installing the printer on an Ethernet network Note Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer For Windows users 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 2 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear Additional printer setup 55 If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of
112. GB Display sRGB Vivid Display True Black Vivid Off RGB US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printer Notes Selecting any setting prints the sample Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output From a browser window type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server Manual Color RGB Image Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off RGB Text Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off RGB Graphics Vivid sRGB Display Display True Black sRGB Vivid Off Customizes the RGB color conversions Notes sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation This is preferred for business graphics and text Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter more saturated colors Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors Off turns off co
113. INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com 2012 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERN
114. In the Banned Fax List field enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block Canceling an outgoing fax Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Faxing 124 Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory 1 On the home screen touch Cancel Jobs The Cancel Jobs screen appears 2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel Only three jobs appear on the screen touch the down arrow until the job you want appears and then touch the job you want to cancel 3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears the selected jobs are deleted and then the home screen appears Understanding fax options Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Ch
115. MENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Notices 312 Government end users a only as Commercial Items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registere
116. Multipurpose feeder Duplexer Folio 215 9 x 330 2 mm 8 5 x 13 in X Statement 139 7 x 215 9 mm 5 5 x 8 5 in X Universal Note Turn size sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes 148 x 210 mm to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 5 83 x 8 27 in to 8 5 x 14 in X 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in X X X X 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 215 9 x 914 4 mm 8 5 x 36 in 1 X X X X 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in to 215 9 x 1219 2 mm 8 5 x 48 in 1 X X X X 7 3 4 Envelope Monarch 98 4 x 190 5 mm 3 875 x 7 5 in X X X X 9 Envelope 98 4 x 226 1 mm 3 875 x 8 9 in X X X X Com 10 Envelope 104 8 x 241 3 mm 4 12 x 9 5 in X X X X DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 in X X X X C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 01 in X X X X B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 in X X X X Other Envelope2 85 7 x 165 mm to 215 9 x 355 6 mm 3 375 x 6 50 in to 8 5 x 14 in X X X X 1 Supported by X790 models only 2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in unless the size is specified by the software application Paper and specialty media guidelines 83 Supported paper types and weights The printer supports 60 176 g m2 16 47 lb paper weights for one sided printing Two sided printing is supported on 64 176 g m2 17 47 lb paper weights Not
117. Note Off is the factory default setting Settings menu General Settings menu Menu item Description Display Language English Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Sets the language of the text appearing on the display Note All languages may not be available for all printers Understanding printer menus 172 Menu item Description Eco Mode Off Energy Energy Paper Paper Minimizes the use of energy paper or specialty media Notes Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings Energy minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not ADF Loaded Beep Enabled Disabled Specifies whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded Note Enabled is the factory default setting Quiet Mode Off On Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer Notes Off is the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setti
118. Notice to Users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information Notices 321 Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between t
119. P screen advanced options 133 options 131 132 133 FTP Settings menu 204 fuser or transfer module ordering 238 G General Settings menu 172 Green settings Eco Mode 63 Quiet Mode 63 green settings Hibernate Mode 65 H held jobs 92 printing from a Macintosh computer 93 printing from Windows 93 Help menu 229 Hibernate Mode using 65 hiding icons on the home screen 20 holding faxes 127 home screen hiding icons 20 showing icons 20 home screen buttons and icons description 15 HTML menu 227 I Image menu 228 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 21 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 21 initial fax setup 115 using the Embedded Web Server 115 Insert hole punch box 265 Insert staple cartridge 265 Install bin x 265 Install envelope feeder 265 Install Tray x 265 installing a memory card 30 installing an Internal Solutions Port 34 installing on a wireless network using Windows 51 installing options order of installation 44 installing printer on wireless network 51 installing printer hard disk 38 installing printer on a network Ethernet networking 55 installing printer on a wireless network using Macintosh 52 installing printer software adding options 49 installing printer software Windows 48 installing the 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 45 installing the 550 sheet tray 45 internal print server troubleshooting 293 Internal Solutions Port changing port settings 58
120. REN de ces appareils ne doit pas d passer cinq Le num ro REN du modem est indiqu sur l tiquette produit situ e l arri re de l quipement Les compagnies de t l phone constatent que les surtensions lectriques en particulier celles dues la foudre entra nent d importants d g ts sur les terminaux priv s connect s des sources d alimentation CA Il s agit l d un probl me majeur d chelle nationale En cons quence il vous est recommand de brancher un parasurtenseur dans la prise de courant laquelle l quipement est connect Utilisez un parasurtenseur r pondant des caract ristiques nominales satisfaisantes et certifi par le laboratoire d assureurs UL Underwriter s Laboratories un autre laboratoire agr de type NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory ou un organisme de certification agr dans votre r gion ou pays Ceci pr vient tout endommagement de l quipement caus par les orages et autres surtensions lectriques Cet quipement utilise des prises de t l phone CA11A Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty A
121. Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu Repeat Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows Users 1 With a document open click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 2 Click Other Options gt Print and Hold 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 Go to the printer to release the print job From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt your PIN gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select your print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Veri
122. Rough is the factory default setting Envelope Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Texture Rough Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Letterhead Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Preprinted Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Colored Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Light Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Texture Rough Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded Notes Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if the custom type is supported Understanding printer menus 146 Paper Weight menu Menu item De
123. Source Auto Tray x Multi Purpose Feeder Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax Output Bin Standard Bin Bin 1 x Specifies an output bin for received faxes Note Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed Sides Duplex Off On Enables duplex printing two sided printing for incoming fax jobs Understanding printer menus 193 Menu item Description Separator Sheets None Before Job After Job Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet Fax Footer Off On Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax Note Off is the factory default setting Max Speed 33600 2400 4800 9600 14400 Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received Fax Forwarding Print Print and Forward Forward Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient Forward to Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded Note This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server Forward to Shortcut Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type Fax E mail FTP LDSS or eSF Block No Name Fax Off On Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified Banned Fax
124. The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 37 13 Reattach the system board cover Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 27 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 38 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP a Using a flathead screwdriver loosen the screws b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket Additional printer setup 39 c Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press down on the printer hard disk unti
125. USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Auto On Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 160 Menu item Description USB Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the size of the USB input buffer Notes
126. X790 Series User s Guide November 2012 www lexmark com Machine type s 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 g02 t01 t02 g91 g92 f01 f02 g81 g82 Contents Safety information 7 Learning about the printer 9 Finding information about the printer 9 Selecting a location for the printer 10 Printer configurations 11 Basic functions of the scanner 12 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass 13 Understanding the printer control panel 14 Understanding the home screen 15 Understanding the home screen
127. Y IN USE Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user To help prevent errors make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination configuration settings ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS In the destination configuration settings lower the scan settings For example lower the scan resolution disable Color or change the Content type to Text CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT If you still cannot isolate the problem then contact customer support Troubleshooting 290 Solving option problems Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed Try one or more of the following RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER 1 Turn the printer off using the power switch 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and then from the printer 3 Check the connection between the option and the printer MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list If the option is not listed then reinstall it For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option or go to www lexmark com to view the option instruction sheet MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED From the computer you are printing from select the op
128. Y STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark Temperature information Ambient temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping and storage temperature 40 to 40 C 104 F Laser notice The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel ser liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena
129. a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Dial Prefix Lets you enter a dialing prefix such as 99 A numeric entry field is provided Dialing Prefix Rules Prefix Rule x Establishes a dialing prefix rule Automatic Redial 0 9 Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number Note 5 is the factory default setting Redial Frequency 1 200 Specifies the number of minutes between redials Behind a PABX No Yes Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone Enable ECM Yes No Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs Enable Fax Scans On Off Lets you fax files that are scanned at the computer Driver to fax Yes No Allows the driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer Dial Mode Tone Pulse Specifies the dialing sound either as a tone or a p
130. additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add or search the address book 5 Touch Done Customizing e mail settings Adding e mail subject and message information 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch E mail 4 Type an e mail address 5 Touch Options gt Subject 6 Type the e mail subject 7 Touch Done gt Message 8 Type an e mail message 9 Touch Done gt E mail It Changing the output file type 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address gt Send as 4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send PDF Use this to create a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader i
131. age Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first For duplex letterhead printing place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last Loading paper and specialty media 75 Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer Notes Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter Load only one size and type of paper at a time 5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled 6 From the printer control panel set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type based on the paper or specialty media loaded Linking and unlinking trays Linking trays Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies When one linked tray is empty paper feeds from the next linked tray When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays the trays are automatically linked Loading paper and speci
132. ager In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type devmgmt msc gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 In the Start Search or Run dialog type devmgmt msc 3 Press Enter or click OK b Double click Ports COM amp LPT to expand the list of available ports Additional printer setup 60 c Do either of the following Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 Right click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer example COM1 d From the menu that appears select Properties e On the Port Settings tab set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the printer Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings f Click OK and then close all the dialogs g Print a test page to verify printer installation Additional printer setup 61 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycl
133. ain Paper is the factory default setting Manual Envelope Size 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting Manual Envelope Type Envelope Rough Envelope Custom Type x Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded Note Envelope is the factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Menu item Description Configure MP Cassette Manual First Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Notes Cassette is the factory default setting Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Understanding printer menus 144 Substitute Size menu Menu item Description Substitute Size All Listed Off Statement A5 Letter A4 Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Notes All Listed is the factory default setting All available size substitutions are allowed Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed Setting a size substitution lets a print job continue without a Change Paper message appearin
134. al Protocol is set to XON XOFF Understanding printer menus 165 Menu item Description Baud 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 1200 2400 4800 Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port Notes 9600 is the factory default setting 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus Data Bits 8 7 Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame Note 8 is the factory default setting Parity None Ignore Even Odd Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames Note None is the factory default setting Honor DSR Off On Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal Notes Off is the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Menu item Description Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Primary SMTP Gateway Port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout 5 30 Spec
135. al display of the printer control panel Checking the status of the printer supplies Configuring printer settings Configuring network settings Viewing reports To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Notes If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly 2 Press Enter Checking the virtual display 1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel showing printer messages Checking the status of the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Administrative support 246 If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in
136. al print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 161 Parallel x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It
137. alty media 76 The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder The printer can sense A4 A5 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive and Universal paper sizes The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Note To link the multipurpose feeder Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size Type menu Unlinking trays Note Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked Change one of the following tray settings Paper Type Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays assign a different Paper Type name to the tray such as Custom Type x or define your own custom name Paper Size Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu Warning Potential Damage Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in a tray The temperature of the fuser varie
138. ame replaces the Custom Type x name in the printer menus Understanding printer menus 150 Custom Bin Names menu Menu Item Description Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin Bin x Specifies a custom name for Bin x Custom Scan Sizes menu Menu item Description Custom Scan Size x Scan Size Name Width 1 8 5 inches 25 215 9 mm Height 1 25 inches 25 635 mm Orientation Portrait Landscape 2 scans per side Off On Specifies a custom scan size name scan sizes and options The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size x in the printer menus Notes 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width 14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side Universal Setup menu These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal paper size The Universal paper size is a user defined paper size setting It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet Menu item Description Units of Measure Inches Millimeters Identifies the unit of measure Note Inches is the US fac
139. an It Using the ScanBack Utility You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan to computer profiles The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com 1 Set up your scan to computer profile a Launch the ScanBack Utility b Select the printer If no printers are listed then contact your system support person or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create d Assign a file name of your scan profile and then specify a location on your computer e Click Finish A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images Note You can select Create Shortcut to create a shortcut of the scan profile settings to your desktop 2 Scan your original documents a Load all pages into the ADF or on the scanner glass b From the printer control panel navigate to Held jobs gt Profiles and Solutions gt select your scan profile Note Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified Scanning to a computer or flash drive 135 Understanding scan profile options Original Size This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document tha
140. an change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use to adjust the Background Removal Contrast Color Balance Negative Image Mirror Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you fax the document Custom Job Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job Edge Erase Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scan Transmission Log Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log Faxing 126 Holding and forwarding faxes Holding faxes This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Holding Faxes 3 In the Print Faxes Password field enter a password 4 From t
141. ance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any
142. and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Troubleshooting 261 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom string Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type Try one or more of the following Touch Use curr
143. anel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed Notes Off is the factory default setting On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 155 Menu item Description Mac Binary PS Auto On Off Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs Standard Network Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Displays and sets the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Network Reports menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network Setup gt Reports or Network Reports Menu item Description Pr
144. anned Note Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page Notes Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Content Type Text Text Photo Graphics Photo Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for faxing Notes Text is the factory default setting Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 190 Menu item Description Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies how the output is produced Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using
145. ans 285 scan was not successful 284 scanner unit does not close 282 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 284 U understanding the home screen buttons and icons 15 uneven print density 308 Universal Paper Size 151 setting 68 Universal Setup menu 151 unlinking trays 77 Unsupported USB device please remove 264 updating options in printer driver 49 USB port 46 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 293 using Eco Mode 63 using Hibernate Mode 65 using Quiet Mode 63 using recycled paper 62 using shortcuts sending fax 122 using the address book 110 sending fax 122 using the Embedded Web Server 246 using the ScanBack Utility 135 using the touch screen buttons 16 Utilities menu 222 V verify print jobs 92 printing from a Macintosh computer 93 printing from Windows 93 viewing reports 247 viewing a fax log 124 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 246 volatile memory 230 erasing 230 volatility statement of 230 W waste toner bottle ordering 239 replacing 243 wiping the printer hard disk 231 Wireless menu 159 wireless network configuration information 50 installation using Macintosh 52 installation using Windows 51 wireless network setup in Windows 51 wireless printer setup in Macintosh 52 Index 337 WS Scan about 23 X XPS menu 223 Index 338
146. ape Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page Note Off is the factory default setting Print Page Borders Off On Specifies whether or not a border is printed around the edge of the page Note Off is the factory default setting Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Punch Off 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Determines the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Staple Off On Lets you enable or disable the staple finisher Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed Understanding printer menus 182 Menu item Description Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card ID Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the original document Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Copy To Source Tray x Auto Size Match Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for copy jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Transparency Separators On Off Places a sheet of paper between transparencies Note On is
147. aracter representation and control codes are not executed To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn the printer off or reset the printer Coverage Estimator Off On Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job Note Off is the factory default setting XPS menu Menu item Description Print Error Pages Off On Prints a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting PDF menu Menu item Description Scale to Fit No Yes Scales page content to fit the selected paper size Note No is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 223 Menu item Description Annotations Do Not Print Print Prints annotations in a PDF Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting PostScript menu Menu item Description Print PS Error Off On Prints a page containing the PostScript error Note Off is the factory default setting Lock PS Startup Mode Off On Enables users to disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Resident Flash Disk Establishes the font search order Notes Resident is the factory default setting This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly Make sure the flash memory option or
148. are deleted in order to process print jobs On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory 38 Memory Full appears but downloads are not deleted Print All Order Alphabetical Oldest First Newest First Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selected Notes Alphabetical is the factory default setting Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel Understanding printer menus 215 Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed The printer hard disk cannot be read write or write protected Menu item Description Job Accounting Log Off On Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Note Off is the factory default setting Job Accounting Utilities Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Monthly Weekly Determines how often a log file is created Note Monthly is the factory default setting Log Action at End of Frequency None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires Note None is the factory default setting Disk Near Full Level 1 99 Off Specifies the maximum
149. ark Finland France Germany Ireland Italy New Zealand Netherlands Norway Portugal Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom Faxing 118 For some countries or regions a telephone line adapter is included in the box Use this adapter to connect an answering machine telephone or other telecommunications equipment to the printer 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack Note Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown It will fit the wall jack used in your location Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup 3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes 4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field enter the printer fax number 5 Click Submit Setting the date and time You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fa
150. arning about the printer 9 What are you looking for Find it here The latest supplemental information updates and customer support Documentation Driver downloads Live chat support E mail support Voice support Lexmark Support Web site http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster Machine Type number Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region In the US See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or at http support lexmark com In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with your printer Selecting a location for the printer CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 lb and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any options leave enough room for the
151. ate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Paper Saver gt select desired output gt gt Copy It Creating a custom copy job job build The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job Each set may be scanned using different job parameters When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters The definition of a set depends on the scan source If you scan a document on the scanner glass then a set consists of one page If you scan multiple pages using the ADF then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty If you scan one page using the ADF then a set consists of one page For example 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Options gt Custom Job gt On gt Done gt Copy It When the end of a set is reached the scan screen appears Copying 102 4 Load the next document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedow
152. ation Device Statistics Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Network Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers Understanding printer menus 153 Menu item Description Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Fax Call Log Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted received and blocked calls Note This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about e mail shortcuts Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortc
153. ation of the scanned image Understanding printer menus 197 Menu item Description Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to fax job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Enable Analog Receive Off On Enables analog fax receive Note Off is the factory default setting E mail Settings menu Menu item Description E mail Server Setup Subject Message Base file name Specifies e mail server information Notes The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters The message box has a limitation of 512 characters E mail Server Setup Send me a copy Never appears On by default Off by default Always On Sends a copy of the e mail back to the sender Note Never appears is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 198
154. aware that preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without releasing hazardous emissions Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer Use grain short card stock when possible Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Note Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs Printing 92 Print job type Description Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed
155. ay need to add it using the IP address For more information contact your system support person Additional printer setup 57 Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed in the printer the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address Notes If the printer has a static IP address then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations If the computers are configured to use the network name instead of an IP address then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection then make sure the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly If the printer is connected to the Ethernet network then the wireless configuration completes but the wireless ISP is inactive To activate the wireless ISP disconnect the printer from the Ethernet network turn off the printer and then turn it back on Only one network connection is active at a time To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types turn off the printer connect the cable to switch to an Ethernet connection or disconnect the cab
156. bove all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom s 111 Emergency Service This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom s telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom s specifications There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation and The equipment shall go on hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another South Africa telecommunications notice This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to
157. bs in the print queue Notes 30 sec is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery Auto On Off Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Understanding printer menus 179 Menu item Description Press Sleep Button Sleep Hibernate Do nothing Determines how the printer while in Idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Notes Sleep is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep Mod
158. capacity by adding optional cards Available internal options Memory cards Printer memory Flash memory Fonts Firmware cards Bar Code PrintCryptionTM LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports ISP RS 232 C Serial ISP Parallel 1284 B ISP MarkNetTM N8250 802 11 b g n Wireless ISP MarkNet N8130 10 100 Fiber ISP MarkNet N8120 10 100 1000 Ethernet ISP Additional printer setup 25 Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked Once locked the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Additional printer setup 26 Accessing the system board CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 1 Open the cover 2 Remove the metal panel a Turn the screws on the panel counterclockwise to remove them Additional printer setup 27 b Shift the metal panel to the left to disengage the hooks then pull forward to remove it
159. capacity is 500 sheets Envelopes A5 A6 and statement paper sizes are not supported in this bin Paper and specialty media guidelines 85 Finishing features Paper size Two hole punch Three or four hole punch 5 bin mailbox 500 Sheet Staple Finisher A4 A5 X X X Executive Folio X JIS B5 Legal Letter Statement X X Universal X X Envelopes any size X X X Oficio Paper and specialty media guidelines 86 Printing This chapter covers printing printer reports and job cancelation The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 249 and Storing paper on page 82 Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust settings as necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper 3 Click OK b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see
160. cate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m2 16 lb Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Paper and specialty media guidelines 81 Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24 C 65 to 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 Store paper in cartons when
161. cement CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce risk of fire use only the telecommunications RJ 11 cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or place heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regu
162. certain voltage limits The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Notice to users of the US telephone network FCC requirements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ACTA On the back of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to your telephone company This equipment uses the RJ 11C Universal Service Order Code USOC jack A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises
163. ch as Toner Low or Cartridge Low Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing Status Supplies Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing Access the messages screen for more information on the message and how to clear it USB or USB Thumbdrive View select print scan or e mail photos and documents from a flash drive Note This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URL into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function and not from any other application Held Jobs Display all current held jobs Understanding the home screen 15 Other buttons that may appear on the home screen Touch To Search held jobs Search on any of the following items User name for held or confidential print jobs Job names for held jobs excluding confidential print jobs Profile names Bookmark container or print job names USB container or print job names for supported file types Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes Note This button appears only when there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set Lock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel N
164. cifies which color to drop during copies and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Understanding printer menus 186 Menu item Description Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast used for the copy job Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Off On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Off On Lets you fix slight skew on the scanned image Note Off is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Sharpness 1 5 Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature 4 to 4 Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Sample Copy Off On Creates a sample copy of the original document Note Off is the factory default sett
165. ck Configuration gt Color Samples gt Detailed Options 3 Select a color conversion table 4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number Troubleshooting 310 5 Enter an increment value from 1 255 Note The closer the value is to 1 the narrower the color sample range will appear 6 Click Print Embedded Web Server does not open Try one or more of the following CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Make sure printer IP address is correct TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server For more information contact your system support person Contacting customer support When you contact customer support describe the problem you are experiencing the printer control panel light sequence and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways t
166. connect any answering machines computers with modems or telephone line splitters CHECK FOR JAMS Clear any jams and then make sure that Ready appears TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL 1 Dial the fax number 2 Scan the original document one page at a time Can send but not receive faxes Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer or subscribe to the telephone company s Distinctive Ring service then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu
167. continue printing Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer 54 Standard network software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer or print server Troubleshooting 272 55 Unsupported option in slot x 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 56 Parallel port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the parallel port Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Serial port x disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the serial port Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled 56 Standard USB port disabled Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message The printer discards any data received through the USB port Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled 56 Standard parallel port disabled Try one or more of the following
168. ctory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Black Only Mode Off On Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridge Note Off is the factory default setting Download Target RAM Flash Disk Sets the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in RAM is temporary Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off This menu item appears only if a flash and or disk option is installed Resource Save Off On Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is available Notes Off is the factory default setting Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads
169. cument into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Scanning to an FTP address 129 3 Press and then enter the FTP shortcut number 4 Touch Send It Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts gt name of recipient gt Search Creating shortcuts Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers using the Embedded Web Server and using the printer touch screen Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Set
170. cument open click File gt Print 2 Select the printer and then navigate to Properties gt Fax tab gt Enable fax 3 Enter the recipient fax number s in the Fax number s field Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature 4 If necessary enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field Faxing 121 5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation 6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax then select Include cover page with fax and enter the appropriate information 7 Click OK Notes The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver For information on installing these drivers see the Software and Documentation CD The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be used If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected then you will be prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent If this check box is not selected then the queued document will be sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab Sending a fax using shortcuts Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine A shortcut number 1 99999 can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do n
171. customize the attachment file name Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e mail Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The e mail screen appears with the new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document E mailing 112 Resolution Adjusts the output quality of your e mail Increasing the image resolution increases the e mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e mail file size Color This option sets the output color for the scanned image Touch to enable or disable color Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser
172. d certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Allow means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a bad certificate is provided it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally Never means no server certificate is requested Minimum PIN Length 1 16 Limits the digit length of the PIN Note 4 is the is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 168 Confidential Print menu Menu item Description Max Invalid PIN Off 2 10 Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Once the limit is reached the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted Notes Off is the factory default setting If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value If the printer is turned off all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted Disk Wiping menu Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in
173. d in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Notices 327 Index Numerics 1565 Emulation error load emulation option 278 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder installing 45 200 paper jam 251 2000 sheet high capacity feeder loading 72 201 paper jam 251 202 203 paper jams 252 230 paper jam 253 231 239 paper jams 254 24x paper jam 254 250 paper jam 255 280 289 paper jam 256 290 292 paper jams 257 31 xx Missing or Defective color cartridge 270 32 xx color cartridge part number unsupported by device 270 34 Incorrect paper size open src 270 35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 270 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 271 37 Insufficient memory to collate job 271 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 271 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 271 38 Memory full 271 39 Complex page some data may not have printed 271 40 color invalid
174. d password Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended Notes If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Additional printer setup 50 Installing the printer on a wireless network Windows Before installing the printer on a wireless network make sure Your wireless network is set up and is working properly The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer 1 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer 1 2 Note Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready Warning Potential Damage Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen 2 Obtain a copy of th
175. d then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Setting up Scan to Network Icon Description The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard copy document and route it to a shared network folder You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations Notes The printer must have permission to write to the destinations From the computer where the destination is specified use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Scan to Network Setting up and using the home screen applications 22 3 Specify the destinations and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen and then follow the instructions on the printer display Setting up My MFP Icon Descrip
176. d trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Notices 313 Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with
177. de Memory card Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly CHECK THE USB PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION Make sure the USB parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected Troubleshooting 293 Solving paper feed problems Paper frequently jams These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PAPER Use recommended paper and specialty media For more information see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY Load paper from a fresh package Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared CHECK THE PAPER PATH The paper path is not clear Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path and then touch Continue Jammed pages are not reprinted TURN ON JAM RECOVERY 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery
178. dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number For more information on using the fax with a PBX system see the documentation that came with your PBX system Faxing 117 Connecting to a distinctive ring service A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line with each telephone number having a different ring pattern This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack 3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer Note The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On This allows the printer to answer single double and triple ring patterns a From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Settings gt Distinctive Rings b Select the pattern setting you want to change and then touch Submit Connecting to an adapter for your country or region The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack Country Region Austria Cyprus Denm
179. dle The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity When the printer enters Sleep mode the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off If scanning is supported then the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode Paper Enable the automatic duplex feature Turn off print log features Reducing printer noise To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode gt select a setting gt Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 63 Choose To Off Note Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Use factory default settings This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer On Reduce printer noise Print jobs will process at a reduced speed Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There will be a short delay before the f
180. document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Color Gray Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color Note Color is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 204 Menu item Description Resolution 150 200 300 400 600 75 Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned Notes A4 is the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Understanding printer menus 205 Menu item Description JPEG Quality Be
181. does not respond 281 partial document or photo copies 283 poor copy quality 282 poor scanned image quality 285 scanner unit does not close 282 copying adding a date and time stamp 103 adding an overlay message 103 adjusting quality 100 canceling a copy job 103 104 collating copies 101 custom job job build 102 different paper sizes 99 enlarging 100 in black and white 98 multiple pages on one sheet 102 on both sides of the paper duplexing 99 on letterhead 97 on transparencies 97 photos 97 placing separator sheets between copies 101 quick copy 96 reducing 100 selecting a tray 98 to a different size 98 using the ADF 96 using the scanner glass flatbed 97 copying different paper sizes 99 copying multiple pages on one sheet 102 copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 99 copying on letterhead 97 copying on transparencies 97 copying photos 97 corrupted printer hard disk 263 creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 120 creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 130 creating profiles using the ScanBack Utility 135 Custom Bin Names menu 151 custom name configuring 78 Custom Names menu 150 custom paper type name creating 77 Custom Scan Sizes menu 151 Custom Type x changing name 77 changing paper type 78 Custom Types menu 150 customer support contacting 311 D date and time fax setting 119 daylight savings time faxing 120 Default Source menu 141 different paper si
182. dvanced Options gt Delayed Send Note If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server the Delayed Send button will not appear Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue Faxing 123 4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes If the current time is shown the left arrow is unavailable 5 Touch Fax It Note The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time Viewing a fax log 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Reports gt Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log Blocking junk faxes 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup gt Block No Name Fax Notes This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name
183. e Labels transparencies envelopes and card stock always print at reduced speed Paper type Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Optional 550 sheet tray Optional 2 000 sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplexer Paper Plain Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Light Heavy Rough Cotton Custom Type x Card stock X Transparencies1 2 X X X X Labels3 Paper Vinyl X Envelopes4 X X X X 1 This media is supported only in the multipurpose feeder 2 Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies 3 Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For more information see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com 4 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed facedown on a table Supported finishing features The printer supports the following finishing features 500 Sheet Offset Stacker 500 Sheet Staple Finisher Paper and specialty media guidelines 84 500 Sheet Staple Hole Punch Finisher 5 bin mailbox 1 2 1 Standard bin 2 Finisher bin Standard bin The paper capacity is 500 sheets Finishing options are not supported in this bin Envelopes are routed here Finisher bin The paper
184. e then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode If the printer is in Hibernate mode then the touch screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and is blinking Press and Hold Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Determines how the printer while in Idle state reacts to a long press of the Sleep button Notes Do Nothing is the factory default setting Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration If the printer is in Sleep Mode then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in RAM are deleted Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected Understanding printer menus 180 Copy Settings menu Menu item Description
185. e Print dialog LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it Troubleshooting 298 Print irregularities Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE Replace the defective fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Troubleshooting 299 Print is too dark Try one or more of the following LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity Store
186. e factory default setting Understanding printer menus 192 Menu item Description ADF Skew Fix Off On Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Note Off is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies if the original document is scanned edge to edge prior to faxing Note Off is the factory default setting Sharpness 0 5 Adjusts the sharpness of a fax Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature 4 to 4 Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Enable Color Fax Scans Off by default On by default Never use Always use Enables color faxing Note Off by default is the factory default setting Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Faxes On Off Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white Note On is the factory default setting Fax Receive Settings Menu item Description Enable Fax Receive On Off Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer Note On is the factory default setting Rings to Answer 1 25 Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job Note 1 is the factory default setting Auto Reduction On Off Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax source Note On is the factory default setting Paper
187. e line If your telecommunications equipment uses a US style RJ11 telephone line then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack Faxing 116 Connecting to a DSL service If you subscribe to a DSL service then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord and then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter Note Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration 3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack 2 3 1 Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter then follow these steps to connect the equipment 1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port 2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use Notes Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region Depending on the ISDN port assignment you may have to connect to a specific port When using a PBX system make sure the call waiting tone is off When using a PBX system
188. e multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media such as transparencies labels card stock and envelopes It can be used for single page or manual printing or as an additional tray The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately 100 sheets of 75 g m2 20 lb paper 10 envelopes 75 transparencies The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions Width 89 mm 3 5 in to 229 mm 9 02 in Length 127 mm 5 in to 1270 mm 50 in Note Maximum width and length can be applied only to short edge feeding Note Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking Doing so may cause a jam 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door 2 For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter size paper gently pull the extension until it is fully extended 3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease them Straighten the edges on a level surface Loading paper and specialty media 74 Paper Envelopes Transparencies Note Avoid scratching or touching the print side 4 Push the paper pick tab and then load the paper or specialty media Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop and then release the paper pick tab 1 2 Warning Potential Dam
189. e printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a hard drive Note Not all printers have a hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises While most data can be erased electronically you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk Degaussing Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note While most data can be erased electronically the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply power down the device Securing the memory before moving the printer 230 Erasing non volatile memory Individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu Fax data Erase fax settings and data by selectin
190. e software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system 3 Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK Additional printer setup 51 In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe c Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive 4 Click Install and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type 6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog select Guided Setup Recommended Note Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation 7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer Note After the printer is configured the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly 8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note For more information on allowing
191. ect a paper type gt Submit Assigning a custom paper type name Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a custom paper type name gt select a tray gt Submit Configuring a custom name If the printer is on a network then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types gt select the custom name you want to configure gt select a paper or specialty media type gt Submit Loading paper and specialty media 78 Paper and specialty media guidelines Paper guidelines Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock Weight The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g m2 16 to 47 lb bond grain long Paper lighter than 60 g m2 16 lb might not be stiff enough to feed properly causing
192. edia and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 lb and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn the printer off using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it Lift the printer off the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized repla
193. en the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Copying 100 Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer 7 Touch gt Copy It Collating copies If you print multiple copies of a document then you can choose to print each copy as a set collated or to print the copies as groups of pages not collated Collated Not collated By default Collate is set to On If you do not want to collate your copies then change the setting to Off 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt enter the number of copies gt Collate gt Off gt gt Copy It Placing separator she
194. en turn it back on 3 From the printer control panel touch your language 4 Touch your country or region and then touch Continue 5 Select your time zone and then touch Continue 6 Touch Fax and E mail to clear the icons and then touch Continue Note You can use these same steps to disable fax and e mail Caller ID is not shown Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns you may have to change the default setting There are two settings available FSK pattern 1 and DTMF pattern 2 The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use Troubleshooting 286 Cannot send or receive a fax These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure if applicable Telephone Handset Answering machine CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK 1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack 2 Listen for a dial tone 3 If you do not hear a dial tone then plug a differ
195. ent paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation Try one or more of the following Touch Use current paper source to ignore the message and print from the selected tray Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu and then touch Paper changed continue Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Close paper transport cover Close the paper transport unit cover or door Troubleshooting 262 Close left side door Close the left side door of the printer Close tray door Close the specified tray door Close finisher side door Close the side door of the finisher Close finisher top cover Close the top cover of the finisher Close front door Close the front door of the printer Close top access cover Close the specified door or cover Disk corrupted The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk and the hard disk cannot be repaired The hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatt
196. ent telephone into the wall jack 4 If you still do not hear a dial tone then plug a telephone into a different wall jack 5 If you hear a dial tone then connect the printer to that wall jack REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST The fax modem is an analog device Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used If you are using an ISDN telephone service then connect the printer to an analog telephone port an R interface port on an ISDN terminal adapter For more information and to request an R interface port contact your ISDN provider If you are using DSL then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use For more information contact your DSL provider If you are using a PBX telephone service then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX If none exists consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly If the telephone line is being used by another device then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax If you are using the On Hook Dial feature then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone Troubleshooting 287 TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT To ensure the printer is working correctly connect it directly to the telephone line Dis
197. ents a Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass b If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Scanning to a computer or flash drive 134 c Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad or touch Held Jobs on the home screen and then touch Profiles d After entering the shortcut number the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified If you touched Profiles on the home screen then locate your shortcut on the list 8 Return to the computer to view the file The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified Scanning to a flash drive 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer The USB Drive home screen appears 4 Select the destination folder and then touch Scan to USB drive 5 Adjust the scan settings 6 Touch Sc
198. er Notes Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 142 Menu item Description MP Feeder Type Custom Type x Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Custom Type x is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item Manual Paper Size Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Note Only installed trays are listed in this menu Understanding printer menus 143 Menu item Description Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Glossy Heavy Glossy Labels Vinyl Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Paper Custom Type x Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded Note Pl
199. er The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan magenta yellow and black toner needed to produce the desired color The object information determines the application of color conversion tables For example it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images Why doesn t the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor However because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color matching problems see the question How can I match a particular color such as a corporate logo Troubleshooting 308 The printed page appears tinted Can I adjust the color Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted for example everything printed seems to be too red This can be caused by environmental conditions paper type lighting conditions or user preference In these instances adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amou
200. erminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling Telephone companies report that electrical surges typically lightning transients are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources This has been identified as a major nationwide problem It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in Notices 319 the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks Avis r serv aux utilisateurs du r seau t l phonique du Canada Ce produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industrie Canada Le num ro REN ringer equivalence number num ro d quivalence de sonnerie fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant tre connect s l interface t l phonique En bout de ligne le nombre d appareils qui peuvent tre connect s n est pas directement limit mais la somme des
201. es gt Preferences gt Options or Setup For Macintosh users choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop up menus To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in a browser window Color Saver Off On Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images The amount of toner used for text is not reduced Notes Off is the factory default setting On overrides Toner Darkness settings RGB Brightness 6 to 6 Adjusts brightness in color outputs Notes 0 is the factory default setting 6 is the maximum decrease 6 is the maximum increase This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Contrast 0 5 Adjusts contrast in color outputs Notes 0 is the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used RGB Saturation 0 5 Adjusts saturation in color outputs Notes 0 is the factory default setting This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used Color Balance Cyan 5 to 5 Magenta 5 to 5 Yellow 5 to 5 Black 5 to 5 Reset Defaults 0 Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each color Note 0 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 220 Menu item Description Color Samples sR
202. es photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 From the Scale area touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto 5 Touch Copy It Adjusting copy quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content 4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image 5 Touch 6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying Color Laser Use wh
203. es are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Allow color copies On Off Lets you enable or disable color in copying Notes On is the factory default setting Setting this to Off will hide all color specific menus This setting overrides the Color setting Understanding printer menus 181 Menu item Description Sides Duplex 1 sided to 1 sided 1 sided to 2 sided 2 sided to 1 sided 2 sided to 2 sided Specifies whether an original document is duplex two sided or simplex one sided and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex Notes 1 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on one side and the copied page will also have printing on one side 1 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on one side while the copied page will have printing on both sides For example if the original document is six sheets the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides 2 sided to 1 sided The original page has printing on both sides while the copied page will have printing on only one side For example if the original document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet 2 sided to 2 sided The original page has printing on both sides and the copy mimics the original exactly Paper Saver Off 2 on 1 Portrait 2 on 1 Landscape 4 on 1 Portrait 4 on 1 Landsc
204. es from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damaged in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities Note Paper labels are supported Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life For detailed information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Printing 91 When printing on labels Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without sealing excessive curling wrinkling or releasing hazardous emissions Label adhesives face sheet prin
205. esh the browser and then click Apply Setting up and using the home screen applications 21 Activating the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications To use these applications activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information about accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 20 For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Setting up Forms and Favorites Icon Description The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Forms and Favorites 3 Define the bookmarks an
206. esumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Remove paper from all bins Output bins have reached their capacity Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then touch Continue Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored Scanner automatic feeder cover open Close the ADF cover Slide finisher to the left Slide the mailbox or finisher to the left until it clicks into place Some held jobs were not restored Touch Continue to delete the specified job Note Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Touch Cancel to clear the message Troubleshooting 269 Tray x paper size unsupported The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported Replace it with a supported paper size Unsupported disk An unsupported disk has been inserted Remove the unsupported disk and then install a supported one 31 xx Missing or defective color cartridge Try one or more of the following
207. et port Verifying printer setup Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and install it again Network setup page If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Additional printer setup 47 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult a system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Setting up the
208. ets between copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Separator Sheets Note Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies If Collate is set to Off then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job 4 Select one of the following Between Copies Between Jobs Copying 101 Between Pages None 5 Touch and then Copy It Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet In order to save paper you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto a single sheet of paper Notes The Paper Size must be set to Letter Legal A4 or JIS B5 The Copy Size must be set to 100 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navig
209. etting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Blank Pages Do Not Print Print Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Settings Setup menu Menu item Description Printer Language PS Emulation PCL Emulation Sets the default printer language Notes PS Emulation is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Job Waiting Off On Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information and or options are obtained the stored jobs print Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if a non read only printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Understanding printer menus 214 Menu item Description Print Area Normal Fit to Page Whole Page Sets the logical and physical printable area Notes Normal is the fa
210. etwork Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network SSID The SSID is also referred to as the network name Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following Authentication type Inner authentication type 802 1X user name an
211. faceup short edge first into the ADF Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It Copying 96 Copying using the scanner glass 1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt change the copy settings gt Copy It 3 If you have more pages to scan then place the next document on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Next Page 4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen Copying film photos 1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass 2 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Content gt Photo gt gt Photo Film gt gt Copy It gt Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job Copying on specialty media Copying on transparencies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of t
212. faxes then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 2 Place the tray near the printer 3 Turn the printer off 4 Align the printer with the tray and then lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked When necessary remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down Additional printer setup 45 1 2 1 Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 2 Optional 550 sheet trays 5 Turn the printer back on 6 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 49 Attaching cables CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Be sure to match the following The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port Additional printer setup 46 1 2 1 USB port Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing A loss of data or a malfunction can occur 2 Ethern
213. fy and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 Go to the printer to release the print job Printing 93 From the home screen For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt your PIN gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt your user name gt your print job name gt number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK Printing 94 In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or clic
214. g Paper Texture menu Menu item Description Plain Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the plain paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Card Stock Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded Notes Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Recycled Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Glossy Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Labels Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 145 Menu item Description Vinyl Labels Texture Normal Rough Smooth Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Bond Texture Rough Smooth Normal Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loaded Note
215. g Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down and 6 MNO while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will reboot several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs faxes and passwords on the printer 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Note Your printer may not have a hard disk installed Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan print copy and fax jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down and 6 MNO while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the
216. g any cables going into the printer Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order Caster base Optional spacer Optional 550 sheet trays or 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder Standard 550 sheet trays Printer For information on installing a caster base a 550 or 2 000 sheet optional tray spacer or any of the finishers see the setup documentation that came with the option Additional printer setup 44 Installing optional trays The printer supports the following optional input sources 550 sheet tray 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 lb and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and
217. hat came with the replacement part 83 xx Transfer module life warning 1 Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Transfer module missing Insert the transfer module into the printer 88 xx color cartridge nearly low Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge Troubleshooting 276 88 xx color cartridge low 1 Remove the specified cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the cartridge and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Notes Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded When the print remains faded replace the cartridge Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily 88 xx Color cartridge very low The specified print cartridge is very low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 88 xx Color cartridge critically low The specified print cartridge is critically low 1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge from the
218. he Held Fax Mode menu select one of the following Off Always On Manual Scheduled 5 If you selected Scheduled then continue with the following steps a Click Fax Holding Schedule b From the Action menu select Hold faxes c From the Time menu select the time you want the held faxes released d From the Day s menu select the day you want the held faxes released 6 Click Add Forwarding a fax This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number e mail address FTP site or LDSS 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings 3 From the Fax Forwarding menu select one of the following Print Print and Forward Forward Faxing 127 4 From the Forward to menu select one of the following Fax E mail FTP LDSS eSF 5 In the Forward to Shortcut field enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded Note The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the Forward to menu 6 Click Submit Faxing 128 Scanning to an FTP address ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page d
219. he antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il do
220. he multipurpose feeder 74 Linking and unlinking trays 76 Paper and specialty media guidelines 79 Paper guidelines 79 Supported paper sizes types and weights 82 Printing 87 Printing a document 87 Printing from a flash drive 88 Printing on specialty media 90 Printing confidential and other held jobs 92 Printing information pages
221. he original document gt 4 Touch Copy to and then select the tray that contains transparencies or touch Manual Feeder Size 5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder 6 From the home screen navigate to gt select the desired size of the transparencies gt Manual Feeder Type gt gt Copy It Copying on letterhead 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to gt Manual Feeder Copying 97 4 Place the letterhead faceup top edge first in the multipurpose feeder 5 Select the size of the letterhead 6 Navigate to Continue gt Letterhead gt Continue gt Copy It Customizing copy settings Copying in black and white 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate t
222. he types of memory along with the types of data stored by each are described below Volatile memory Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs Non volatile memory Your device may utilize two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information scanner and bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some devices have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print related The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information create folders create disk or network file shares or FTP information directly from a client device The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan print copy and fax jobs as well as form data and font data There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer A partial list includes The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard drive is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization The printer is being removed from your premises for service Th
223. hite Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Copying 105 Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Duplex Use to specify the document orientation whether documents are one sided or two sided and how documents are bound Note Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers Advanced Imaging Use to change or adjust Auto Center Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you copy the document Create Booklet Use to create a booklet You can choose between 1 sided and 2 sided booklets Note This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed
224. hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Insert Tray x Insert the specified tray into the printer Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following Insert a staple cartridge Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher Install envelope feeder Try one or more of the following Install the envelope feeder 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Install the envelope feeder Troubleshooting 265 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Cancel the print job Load src with custom type name Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size i
225. ia meets specifications and is not damaged Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded Cannot detect flash memory card Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board Cannot detect printer hard disk Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT ISP CONNECTIONS Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board Troubleshooting 292 CHECK THE CABLE Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions ISP port MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For information on installing the network printing software see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD Internal print server does not operate correctly Try one or more of the following CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY For more information on installing the network printing software do the following 1 Open the Software and Documentation CD 2 Click Additional 3 Under Publications on this CD select Networking Gui
226. if JPEG jpg XPS xps Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP Note PDF pdf is the factory default setting PDF Version 1 2 1 6 A 1a Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP Note 1 5 is the factory default setting Content Type Text Photo Photo Text Graphics Specifies the type of content that will be scanned through FTP Notes Text Photo is the factory default setting Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 208 Menu item Description Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Black and White Laser Specifies the source of content in the scan job Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black and White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is u
227. ifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e mail Note 30 seconds is the factory default setting Reply Address Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Understanding printer menus 166 Menu item Description Use SSL Disabled Negotiate Required Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP server Notes Disabled is the factory default setting When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used SMTP Server Authentication No authentication required Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e mail privileges Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Device Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Notes None is the factory default setting for Device and User Initiated E mail Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected User Initiated E mail None Use Device SMTP Credentials Use Session User ID amp Password Use Session E mail address amp Password Prompt User Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm
228. in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off the color is based on the print job information and no color conversion is implemented Note The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations Additionally certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades displayed as colored boxes that are similar to a user defined RGB or CMYK value The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Cli
229. in the tray or feeder 1 From the printer control panel Paper menu check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings 2 Before sending the print job specify the correct paper type setting For Windows users specify the paper type from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the paper type from the Print dialog MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge Note If print quality does not improve replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact customer support Troubleshooting 296 Gray background on prints ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING Try one or more of the following Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting Increase the background removal setting MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn or defective print cartridge Incorrect margins ABCD ABCD ABCD
230. indows 93 printing from a flash drive 88 printing from a mobile device 88 printing in black and white 87 printing on letterhead 90 publications where to find 9 Q Quality menu 219 Quiet Mode print quality troubleshooting 295 R Reattach bin x 268 Reattach bin x y 268 reattaching the system board cover 27 recycled paper using 62 80 recycling Lexmark packaging 67 Lexmark products 66 toner cartridges 67 reducing a copy 100 reducing printer noise 63 Remote Operator Panel setting up 23 Remove packaging material area name 269 Remove paper from linked set bin name 269 Remove paper from all bins 269 Remove paper from bin x 269 Remove paper from standard output bin 269 removing printer hard disk 43 repeat print jobs 92 printing from a Macintosh computer 93 printing from Windows 93 repeating print defects 302 replacing a print cartridge 240 replacing the waste toner bottle 243 reports viewing 247 Reports menu 153 reserve print jobs 92 printing from a Macintosh computer 93 printing from Windows 93 resolution fax changing 123 Restore held jobs 269 restoring factory default settings 248 S safety information 7 8 saving paper 102 scan screen options 136 scan to computer advanced options setting 137 options 136 137 original size 136 paper orientation setting 137 Scan to Network setting up 22 scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 286 partial document or photo scans 285 scan was no
231. information see Accessing the system board on page 27 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out Additional printer setup 43 3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place and then remove the printer hard disk 1 2 4 Set the printer hard disk aside 5 Reattach the system board cover Order of installation CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 lb and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplu
232. ing Fax Settings menu Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line General Fax Settings Menu item Description Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer Fax Number or Station Number Specifies a number associated with the fax Station ID Fax Name or Station Name Fax Number or Station Number Specifies how the fax is identified Understanding printer menus 187 Menu item Description Enable Manual Fax Off On Sets the printer to fax manually only which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset Notes Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number Touch 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function Memory Use Equal Mostly sent All send All receive Mostly receive Defines the allocation of non volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs Notes Equal is the factory default setting Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs Cancel Faxes Allow Don t Allow Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs
233. ing deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a hard disk with higher capacity Disk problem The printer hard disk must be reformatted Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk Troubleshooting 263 Empty the hole punch box 1 Empty the hole punch box For instructions on emptying the hole punch box from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher and then touch Continue to clear the message Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device has been inserted Remove the USB device and then install a supported one Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator The fax partition appears to be corrupted Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer If the message appears again then contact your system support person Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator The printer is in Fax Server mode but the Fax Server setup has not been completed Try one or more of the following Touch
234. ing program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see Using Eco Mode Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 80 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports duplex printing you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2 sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing N
235. inking does not work These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray Troubleshooting 280 USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray If necessary adjust the settings from the Paper Size Type menu Note The standard 550 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Large jobs do not collate These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON From the Finishing menu or Print Properties set Collate to On Note Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the job MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY Add printer memory or an optional hard disk Unexpected page breaks occur INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value ap
236. int Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt Network Card Menu item Description View Card Status Connected Disconnected Lets you view the connection status of the network card View Card Speed Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card Understanding printer menus 156 Menu item Description View Network Address UAA LAA Lets you view the network addresses End of Job Timeout 0 255 Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled Notes 90 seconds is the factory default setting A setting value of 0 disables the timeout If a value of 1 9 is selected then the setting is saved as 10 Banner Page Off On Allows the printer to print a banner page Note Off is the factory default setting TCP IP menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Description Activate On Off Activates TCP IP Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Lets you set the curre
237. invalid refill change cartridge Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing Troubleshooting 271 51 Defective flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job 52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted Delete fonts macros and other data stored in flash memory Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card 53 Unformatted flash detected Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Format the flash memory If the error message remains the flash memory may be defective and require replacing 54 Network x software error Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to continue printing Turn the printer off wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Upgrade flash the network firmware in the printer 54 Serial option x error Try one or more of the following Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port Check that the serial interface parameters protocol baud parity and data bits are set correctly on the printer and on the host computer Touch Continue to
238. irst page is printed If your printer has faxing capability fax sounds are reduced or disabled including those made by the fax speaker and ringer The fax is placed in standby mode The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Adjusting Sleep Mode To save energy you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode Available settings range from 1 240 minutes The factory default setting is 30 minutes Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 3 In the Sleep Mode field enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts 2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 64 Using Hibernate Mode Hibernate is an ultra low power
239. is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Understanding printer menus 225 Menu item Description PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm Sets the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes 198 mm is the factory default setting The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF Off On Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR Off On Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Notes Off is the factory default setting None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This selection is displayed only when it is
240. is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On If Collate is set to Off a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Understanding printer menus 217 Menu item Description Separator Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies the paper source for separator sheets Notes Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default setting From the Paper menu Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Specifies that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes Off is the factory default setting The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical Specifies the positioning of multiple page images Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait
241. it accepter toute interf rence re ue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Notices 322 Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2005 32 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of
242. item Description Scale 1 400 Scales the default font for HTML documents Notes 100 is the factory default setting Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Portrait Landscape Sets the page orientation for HTML documents Note Portrait is the factory default setting Margin Size 8 255 mm Sets the page margin for HTML documents Notes 19 mm is the factory default setting Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Print Do Not Print Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Note Print is the factory default setting Image menu Menu item Description Auto Fit On Off Selects the optimal paper size scaling and orientation Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images Invert Off On Inverts bi tonal monochrome images Notes Off is the factory default setting This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Best Fit Anchor Center Fit Height Width Fit Height Fit Width Anchor Top Left Scales the image to fit the selected paper size Notes Best Fit is the factory default setting When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Orientation Portrait Landscape Rev Portrait Rev Landscape Sets the image orientation Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 228 He
243. ive Image Off On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Off On Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Note Off is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Sharpness 1 5 Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature 4 to 4 Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Print Settings Copies 1 999 Specifies a default number of copies for each print job Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Tray x Manual Paper MP Feeder Manual Envelope Sets a default paper source for all print jobs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Color Color Black Only Generates color print jobs output Note Color is the factory default setting Collate On 1 2 1 2 1 2 Off 1 1 1 2 2 2 Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies Note On is the factory default setting Sides Duplex 1 sided 2 sided Specifies whethe
244. jams For best performance use 75 g m2 20 lb bond grain long paper For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm 7 x 10 in we recommend 90 g m2 24 lb or heavier paper Note Duplex is supported only for 75 176 g m2 20 47 lb bond paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough the toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points however smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation en
245. k Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Double click the printer icon 3 Select the print job you want to cancel 4 Click Delete For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select your printer gt Open Print Queue System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Open Print Queue 2 From the printer window select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Printing 95 Copying ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple page documents Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings Making copies Making a quick copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the printer control panel press to start copying Copying using the ADF 1 Load an original document
246. l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstr ling n r kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstr len NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokovanej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstr lning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len Notices 316 Power consumption Product power consumption The following
247. l the standoffs are in place d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 40 To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 41 4 Reattach the system board cover Additional printer setup 42 Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the system board For more
248. l trays 1 Open the side door of the specified optional tray 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 3 Close the side door 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 250 paper jam 1 Push the paper pick tab and then remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder 1 2 Warning Potential Damage Pulling the paper out without pushing the paper pick tab first may cause the paper pick tab to break Clearing jams 255 2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out 1 2 Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder and then adjust the paper guides 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 280 289 paper jams 1 Remove all original documents from the ADF 2 Open the ADF cover 3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the ADF cover 5 Reload original documents into the ADF straighten the stack and then adjust the paper guide 6 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 256 290 292 paper jams 290 paper jam Close the ADF cover 291 paper jam Close the scanner glass cover 292 paper jam Try one of more of the following Close the ADF cover Close the scanner cover Contact your system support system person 400 403
249. larly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Safety information 7 Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a professional service person CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as the fax feature power cord or telephone during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each paper drawer or tray separately Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Safety information 8 Learning about the printer Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup inst
250. le to switch to a wireless connection and then turn the printer back on For Windows users 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type Run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 3 To select the printer that has changed do either of the following Press and hold the printer and then select Printer properties Right click the printer and then select Printer properties Windows 7 or later or Properties earlier versions Note If there is more than one copy of the printer then update all of them with the new IP address 4 Click the Ports tab 5 Select the port from the list and then click Configure Port Additional printer setup 58 6 Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field 7 Click OK gt Close For Macintosh users 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View
251. less of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Auto On Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding printer menus 164 Menu item Description Serial Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Disabled Sets the size of the serial input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the si
252. log Port Remote Syslog Method Remote Syslog Facility Log full behavior Admin s e mail address Digitally sign exports Severity of events to log Remote Syslog non logged events E mail log cleared alert E mail log wrapped alert E mail full alert full alert level E mail log exported alert E mail log settings changed alert Log line endings Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created Note Factory default settings enable the security audit log Set Date and Time menu Menu item Description Current Date and Time Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time Note Date Time is set in YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format Time Zone Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically Observe DST On Off Note On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting Custom Time Zone Setup DST Start Week DST Start DayOff DST Start Month DST Start Time DST End Week DST End Day DST End Month DST End Time DST Offset Enables the user to set up the time zone Enable NTP On Off Enables Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a network Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 171 Menu item Description NTP Server Lets you view the NTP Server Address Enable Authentication Off On Lets you change the authentication setting to on or off
253. log and pop up menus MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN DEFECTIVE OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE Replace the worn defective or empty print cartridge Streaked vertical lines ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following THE TONER IS SMEARED Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job From the printer control panel select the Default Source from the Paper Menu For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop up menus A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE Replace the defective toner cartridge THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer module Troubleshooting 305 Toner fog or background shading appears on a page Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE Reinstall or replace the print cartridge MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the transfer belt For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE Replace the fuser For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH Clean any visible toner from the paper path If the problem persists then contact customer support RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER Perform
254. lor conversion Understanding printer menus 221 Menu item Description Manual Color CMYK Image US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Text US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off CMYK Graphics US CMYK Euro CMYK Vivid CMYK Off Customizes the CMYK color conversions Notes US CMYK is the US factory default setting US CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table Off turns off color conversion Spot Color Replacement Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values Color Adjust Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in output Notes Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected Adjusting appears on the display until the process is finished Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process Utilities menu Menu item Description Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Removes confidential and held jobs from the prin
255. lp menu The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer MFP as PDF files They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks including copying scanning and faxing English French German and Spanish translations are stored in the printer Other translations are available at http support lexmark com Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and changing settings Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings E mail Guide Provides information about sending e mails using addresses shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address shortcut numbers or the address book and about changing settings Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies Understanding printer menus 229 Securing the memory before moving the printer Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings information from embedded solutions and user data T
256. ltipurpose feeder 8 Side door 9 Jam access doors 10 Optional 2 000 sheet high capacity feeder 11 Optional 550 sheet trays 12 Caster base Basic functions of the scanner The scanner provides copy fax and scan to network capability for large workgroups You can Make quick copies or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs Send a fax using the printer control panel Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time Scan documents and send them to your computer an e mail address a flash drive or an FTP destination Scan documents and send them to another printer PDF by way of FTP Learning about the printer 12 Understanding the ADF and scanner glass Automatic Document Feeder ADF Scanner glass Use the ADF for multiple pages including duplex pages Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms Using the ADF Load the document into the ADF faceup short edge first Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray Scan sizes from 76 x 139 mm 3 0 x 5 5 in to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Scan documents with mixed page sizes letter and legal Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g m2 14 to 32 lb Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies
257. m too It is important to Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight humidity extremes or temperature fluctuations Clean dry and free of dust Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation Learning about the printer 10 1 2 3 4 5 1 458 mm 18 in 2 100 mm 3 9 in 3 380 mm 14 9 in 4 432 mm 17 in 5 150 mm 5 9 in Printer configurations CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high capacity input tray a duplex unit and an input option or more than one input option If you purchased a multifunction printer MFP that scans copies and faxes you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Learning about the printer 11 You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays 1 2 5 6 7 3 4 8 10 9 9 11 12 1 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 ADF input tray 3 Printer control panel 4 Standard exit bin 5 Front door 6 Standard 550 sheet trays Tray 1 7 Mu
258. make sure the link buffers are set to Auto and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes When Ready appears enable Resource Save Install additional memory Troubleshooting 270 37 Insufficient memory to collate job Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job Cancel the current print job 37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing Delete fonts macros and other data in printer memory Install additional printer memory 37 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Touch Continue to clear the message 37 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk Touch Continue to clear the message 38 Memory full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 39 Complex page some data may not have printed Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Cancel the current print job Install additional printer memory 40 color
259. mputer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt Remote Operator Panel Setting up and using the home screen applications 23 3 Select the Enabled check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Apply To use the application from the Embedded Web Server click Applications gt Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Setting up and using the home screen applications 24 Additional printer setup Installing internal options CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer You can customize your printer connectivity and memory
260. n adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document Color This option enables or disables color in faxing Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding settings Sides Duplex Use to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax Orientation Use to specify the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Delayed Send This lets you send a fax at a later time or date 1 Set up your fax 2 From the home screen navigate to Delayed Send gt enter the date and time you want to send your fax gt Done Note If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent then the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours or when transmission times are cheaper Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you c
261. n on the scanner glass and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed Note If required change the job settings 5 If you have another document to scan then repeat the previous step Otherwise touch Finish the job Placing information on copies Placing the date and time at the top of each page 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Advanced Options gt Header Footer 4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time 5 Touch Yes or No gt gt Copy It Placing an overlay message on each page An overlay message can be placed on each page The message choices are Urgent Confidential Copy Custom or Draft To place a message on the copies 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to
262. n unresponsive printer 261 checking an unresponsive scanner 284 checking printer status on Embedded Web Server 246 checking printer status using the Embedded Web Server 246 checking status of supplies 237 checking the status of supplies 237 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 246 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 246 choosing a fax connection 116 cleaning ADF parts 234 exterior of the printer 233 scanner glass 233 cleaning kit ordering 239 cleaning the printhead lenses 236 Close tray door 263 Close finisher side door 263 Close finisher top cover 263 Close front door 263 Close left side door 263 Close paper transport cover 262 Close top access cover 263 collating copies 101 confidential print jobs 92 printing from a Macintosh computer 93 printing from Windows 93 Confidential Print menu 169 configuration information wireless network 50 configurations printer 11 Configure MP menu 144 configuring e mail settings 108 configuring port settings 58 connecting printer to distinctive ring service 118 connecting the printer to regional adapters 118 conservation settings brightness adjusting 65 Quiet Mode 63 Sleep Mode 64 65 standard exit bin lighting 66 conserving supplies 62 contacting customer support 311 control panel printer 14 copy quality adjusting 100 copy screen advanced options 106 options 104 105 106 107 132 Copy Settings menu 181 copy troubleshooting copier
263. nal document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer E mailing 113 Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix Advanced Imaging Custom Job Edge Erase and Transmission Log settings ADF Skew Fix This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging This lets you adjust the Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shadow Detail Sharpness and Temperature settings before you e mail the document Custom
264. nc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Notices 324 STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product Is manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts Is during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option If this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to tha
265. ng From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Shadow detail gt reduce the current setting From the Copy screen navigate to Advanced Options gt Advanced Imaging gt Background removal gt reduce the current setting Partial document or photo copies These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Troubleshooting 283 CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Solving scanner problems Checking an unresponsive scanner If your scanner is not responding then make sure The printer is turned on The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer print server option or other network device The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors uninterrupted power supplies or extension cords Other elec
266. ng 303 Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper Try one or more of the following ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT If the fill pattern is incorrect choose a different fill pattern from your software program CHECK THE PAPER TYPE Use only the recommended transparencies Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER When 88 xx color cartridge low appears make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge 1 Remove the print cartridge Warning Potential Damage Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs 2 Firmly shake the cartridge side to side and front to back several times to redistribute the toner 3 Reinsert the print cartridge If the problem continues the printer may need to be serviced For more information contact Customer Support Troubleshooting 304 Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Try one or more of the following SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER From the printer control panel Paper Menu select Default Source For Windows users select the paper source from Print Properties For Macintosh users select the paper source from the Print dia
267. ng is best suited for printing text and line graphics For optimal printing of color rich documents set Quiet Mode to Off Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run Initial setup Yes No Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard Notes Yes is the factory default setting After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding printer menus 173 Menu item Description Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key x Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard Paper Sizes US Metric Notes US is the factory default setting Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size Paper Type menu Scan to PC Port Range port range Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall The valid ports are specified by two sets
268. ng scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast 0 5 Best for content Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Off On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting ADF Skew Fix Off On Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned image Note Off is the factory default setting Scan edge to edge Off On Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge to edge Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 207 Menu item Description Sharpness 1 5 Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image Note 3 is the factory default setting Temperature 4 to 4 Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs Cool values generate a bluer output than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default Flash Drive menu Scan Settings Menu item Description Format PDF pdf Secure PDF TIFF t
269. nitial fax setup d f h f ll f h b Faxing 115 Choosing a fax connection Notes The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet Other devices such as a telephone or answering machine can be successfully attached to pass through the printer as described in the setup steps If you want a digital connection such as ISDN DSL or ADSL then a third party device such as a DSL filter is required Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly You do not need to attach the printer to a computer but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes Equipment and service options Fax connection setup Connect directly to the telephone line See Connecting to an analog telephone line on page 116 Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line DSL or ADSL service See Connecting to a DSL service on page 117 Connect to a Private Branch eXchange PBX or Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN system See Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system on page 117 Use a Distinctive Ring service See Connecting to a distinctive ring service on page 118 Connect through an adapter used in your area See Connecting to an adapter for your country or region on page 118 Connecting to an analog telephon
270. nnectors 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 27 2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee Note Avoid touching the components on the card 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board 4 Remove the printer hard disk For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 43 Additional printer setup 34 5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening 2 1 6 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board and press down until the tee clicks into place Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely and the tee is seated firmly on the system board Additional printer setup 35 7 Install the ISP on the plastic tee Angle the ISP over the plastic tee and then slant it toward the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage 8 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee Additional printer setup 36 9 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not yet tighten the thumbscrew 10 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage 11 Tighten the long thumbscrew Warning Potential Damage Do not overtighten the thumbscrew 12 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board Note
271. not supported USB flash drives must support the FAT File Allocation Tables system Devices formatted with NTFS New Technology File System or any other file system are not supported Documents pdf xps Images dcx gif JPEG jpg bmp pcx TIFF tif png Printing on specialty media Tips on using letterhead Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities Before loading letterhead flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together Observe proper page orientation Source Print side Paper orientation Standard 550 sheet tray Optional 550 sheet tray Optional 2000 sheet high capacity feeder Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the left side of the tray Duplex two sided printing from trays Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the right side of the tray Multipurpose feeder simplex printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder first Multipurpose feeder duplex printing Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder last
272. ns mixed paper sizes When Original Size is set to Auto Size Sense the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document Send As This option sets the output PDF TIFF JPEG or XPS for the scanned image PDF Creates a single file with multiple pages viewable with Adobe Reader Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Creates multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG JPEG Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer Scanning to an FTP address 131 Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original doc
273. nstalling a new network Internal Solutions Port 58 Setting up serial printing 59 Contents 2 Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 62 Saving paper and toner 62 Saving energy 63 Recycling 66 Loading paper and specialty media 68 Setting the paper size and type 68 Configuring Universal paper settings 68 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray 69 Loading the 2000 sheet high capacity feeder 72 Loading t
274. nt TCP IP hostname Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP On Off Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Enable RARP On Off Specifies the RARP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Enable BOOTP On Off Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 157 Menu item Description Enable AutoIP Yes No Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable FTP TFTP Yes No Enables the built in FTP server which allows you to send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Yes No Enables the built in web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server add
275. nt of the original document is mostly text or line art Text Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press Other Specifies how content will be produced Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Fax Resolution Standard Fine 200 dpi Super Fine 300 dpi Ultra Fine 600 dpi Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orient
276. nt of toner being used in each color plane Selecting positive or negative values for cyan magenta yellow and black from the Color Balance menu will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color For example if a printed page has a red tint then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected Is there anything I can do to improve the color This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors To obtain the highest projected color quality transmissive overhead projectors are recommended If a reflective projector must be used then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1 2 or 3 will lighten the transparency Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies What is manual color correction When manual color correction is enabled the printer employs user selected color conversion tables to process objects However Color Correction must be set to Manual or no user defined color conversion will be implemented Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed text graphics or images and how the color of the object is specified in the software program RGB or CMYK combinations Notes Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations It is als
277. nt quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 80 xx Fuser life warning Order a replacement fuser immediately When print quality is reduced install the new fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Troubleshooting 275 80 xx Replace fuser Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 80 xx Fuser missing 1 Replace the fuser following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Replace waste toner bottle 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 82 xx Waste toner bottle missing Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer 82 xx Waste toner bottle nearly full Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately 1 Replace the waste toner bottle For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle from the printer control panel touch More Information 2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing 83 xx Replace transfer module Replace the transfer module following the instruction sheet t
278. nter control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Output Lighting 2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby Mode 3 Touch Submit Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see The Notices chapter The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark products for recycling 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 66 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource saving
279. nter off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the excess flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Too many trays attached 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the additional trays Troubleshooting 274 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 58 Input config error 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Check if all tray configurations are correct Remove unnecessary trays if needed 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on 59 Incompatible output bin x Try one or more of the following Remove the specified output bin Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin 61 Remove defective disk Try one or more of the following Remove the defective printer hard disk Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk 62 Disk full Try one or more of the following Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing Delete fonts macros and other data stored on the printer hard disk Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity 80 xx Fuser near life warning 1 Order a replacement fuser immediately 2 When pri
280. o Copy gt Allow color copies gt Off gt gt Submit Copying to a different size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy 4 Touch Copy from gt select the size of the original document gt 5 Touch Copy to gt select the size of the copy gt Note The printer will scale the size automatically 6 Touch Copy It Making copies using paper from a selected tray 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt size of the original document gt Copy to Copying 98 4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use Note If you choose Manual Feeder then you will also need to select the paper size and type 5 Touch Copy It Copying different paper sizes Use the ADF to c
281. o help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems E mail You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and provide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Troubleshooting 311 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark X792de X792dte X792dtfe X792dtpe X792dtme X792dtse Machine type 7562 4917 Model s 432 436 dn1 dn2 gd1 gd2 dt1 dt2 gt1 gt2 df1 df2 gf1 gf2 d01 d02 g01 g02 t01 t02 g91 g92 f01 f02 g81 g82 Edition notice November 2012 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL
282. o not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors The color conversion tables applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto generate preferred colors for the majority of documents To manually apply a different color conversion table 1 From the Quality menu select Color Correction and then select Manual 2 From the Quality menu select Manual Color and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type Manual Color menu Object type Color conversion tables RGB Image RGB Text RGB Graphics Vivid Produces brighter more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats sRGB Display Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs Display True Black Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray sRGB Vivid Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics Off No color correction is implemented Troubleshooting 309 Object type Color conversion tables CMYK Image CMYK Text CMYK Graphics US CMYK Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP Specifications for Web Offset
283. ocument into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number To create a group of fax numbers touch Next number and then enter the next fax number 4 Navigate to gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done gt OK gt Fax It Sending a fax Sending a fax using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen touch Fax 4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad To add recipients touch Next Number and then enter the recipient s telephone number or shortcut number or search the address book Note To place a dial pause within a fax number press The dial pause appears as a comma in the Fax to box Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the computer The printer driver fax option allows you to print to fax where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather than print it The fax option functions as a normal fax machine but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel 1 With a do
284. ocuments Use the scanner glass for single pages small items such as postcards or photos transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol FTP server Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number An FTP destination could also be another printer for example a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer Scanning to an FTP address Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt FTP gt type the FTP address gt Send It Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a do
285. of numbers separated by a semicolon Note 9751 12000 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 174 Menu item Description Displayed Information Left side Right side Custom Text x x Toner Fuser Transfer Module Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screen For the Left side and Right side menus select from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name For the x Toner x Fuser and Transfer Module menus select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Understanding printer menus 175 Menu item Description Displayed Information Waste Toner Bottle Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Lets you customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Select from the following options Display No Yes Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes No is
286. omething metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board 1 Access the system board For more information see Accessing the system board on page 27 Note This task requires a flathead screwdriver 2 Unpack the memory card Note Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card Additional printer setup 30 3 On the system board open the memory card connector latches 4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector 1 2 1 Notch 2 Ridge Additional printer setup 31 5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place 6 Reattach the system board cover Installing a flash memory or firmware card The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card Only one of each may be installed but the connectors are interchangeable CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity
287. on the display 5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings 6 Stop Cancel Stops all printer activity Note A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display 7 Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen 8 Card reader Limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated users Note The card reader may not be available on all printer models 9 USB port Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images Learning about the printer 14 Understanding the home screen Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying faxing or scanning to open the menu screen or to respond to messages Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Touch To Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies E mail Access the E mail menus and send e mails Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax Access the printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol FTP menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server Status message bar Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer conditions su
288. onal factory default setting A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12 is the factory default setting Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For non scalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a page Notes Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Specifies the number of lines that print on each page Notes 60
289. oose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document is from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Resolution This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax If you are faxing a photo a drawing with fine lines or a document with very small text then increase the Resolution setting This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output Standard Suitable for most documents Fine 200 dpi Recommended for documents with small print Super fine 300 dpi Recommended for original documents with fine detail Ultra fine 600 dpi Recommended for documents with pictures or photos Note Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected Faxing 125 Darkness This optio
290. opy original documents with different paper sizes Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the Copy to and Copy from settings each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes Example 1 or scaled to fit a single paper size Example 2 Example 1 Copying on mixed paper sizes 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt gt Copy to gt Auto Size Match gt gt Copy It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document Example 2 Copying on a single paper size 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Copy gt Copy from gt Mixed Sizes gt gt Copy to gt Letter gt gt Co
291. ot place postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad 4 Touch Fax It Sending a fax using the address book The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers Note If the address book feature is not enabled then contact your system support person 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt gt Browse shortcuts 4 Using the virtual keyboard type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find Note Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time 5 Touch Done gt Fax It Faxing 122 Customizing fax settings Changing the fax resolution Settings range from Standard fastest speed to Ultra Fine slowest speed best quality 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load po
292. ote This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and password has been set Unlock Device Open a password entry screen Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel Note This button appears only when the printer is locked The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings Print Fax and Network The following options are available under the Print Fax and Network headings Print job Copy job Fax profile FTP E mail send Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen If more than three jobs exist in a column then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs Change Language Launch the Change Language pop up window that allows you to change the primary language of the printer Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and administrative setup Understanding the home screen 16 Sample touch screen Submit Touch To Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings Sample Copy Print a sample copy Right arrow Scroll to the right Left arrow Scroll to the left Home Return to the home screen Right increase Select a higher value Left decrease Select a lower value Exit
293. oto mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note A maximum of 53 characters is allowed Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast of the scanned image Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 211 Menu item Description Negat
294. ow Detail Sharpness and Temperature before scanning a document Custom Job Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job Edge Erase Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper or pick a particular edge Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image Transmission Log Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log Scanning to a computer or flash drive 137 Understanding printer menus Menus list Supplies Paper Menu Reports Settings Replace Supply Cyan Cartridge Magenta Cartridge Yellow Cartridge Black Cartridge Separator Pick Assembly and Roller Waste Toner Bottle Fuser Transfer Module Staples Hole Punch Box Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loading Custom Types Custom Names Custom Scan Sizes Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Network Setup Page Network x Setup Page Shortcut List Fax Job Log Fax Call Log Copy Shortcuts E mail Shortcuts Fax Shortcuts FTP Shortcuts Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings E mail Settings FTP Settings Flash Drive Menu
295. ow long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Security Reset Jumper Access controls No Security No Effect Reset factory security defaults Changes the value of the security settings Notes Access controls No Security retains all the security information that the user has defined No Security is the factory default setting No Effect means the reset has no effect on the device s security configuration Reset factory security defaults deletes all security information that the user has defined and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page LDAP Certificate Verification Demand Try Allow Never Allows the user to request a server certificate Notes Demand means a server certificate is requested If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided the session is terminated immediately Demand is the factory default setting Try means a server certificate is requested If no certificate is provided the session proceeds normally If a ba
296. ows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type control printers gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b In the Start Search or Run dialog type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Depending on your device do either of the following Press and hold the printer you want to update Right click the printer you want to update 3 From the menu that appears do either of the following For Windows 7 or later select Printer properties For earlier versions select Properties 4 Click the Configuration tab 5 Do either of the following Click Update Now Ask Printer Under Configuration Options manually add any installed hardware options 6 Click Apply For Macintosh users 1 From the Apple menu navigate to either of the following System Preferences gt Print amp Scan gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver System Preferences gt Print amp Fax gt select your printer gt Options amp Supplies gt Driver 2 Add any installed hardware options and then click OK Additional printer setup 49 Setting up wireless printing Note A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and 802 1X RADIUS are types of security used on a n
297. p Mode if Eco Mode is set to Off or Paper Error Lighting On Off Determines if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters errors Note On is the factory default setting Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Notes On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback 5 is the factory default setting for Volume Tactile Touchscreen Feedback On Off Specifies whether the printer control panel provides touch sensation feedback Show Bookmarks Yes No Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Note Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Allow Background Removal On Off Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy fax e mail FTP or scan to USB jobs Note On is the factory default setting The background of the image will be removed Allow Custom Job Scans On Off Lets you scan multiple documents into one file Note On is the factory default setting If On is selected then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs Scanner Jam Recovery Job level Page level Specifies how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADF Notes If Job level is selected then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam If Page level is selected then rescan from the jammed page forward Understanding printer menu
298. paper jam 256 280 299 234 290 292 paper jams 257 400 403 paper jams 257 431 438 paper jams 258 460 461 paper jams 257 Paper Loading menu 148 paper size setting 68 Paper Size Type menu 141 paper sizes supported by printer 82 Paper Texture menu 145 paper type setting 68 paper types duplex support 84 supported by printer 84 where to load 84 Paper Weight menu 147 Parallel x menu 162 PCL Emul menu 224 PDF menu 223 photos copying 97 placing separator sheets between copies 101 port settings configuring 58 PostScript menu 224 print cartridge replacing 240 print cartridges ordering 238 print irregularities 299 print job canceling from computer 94 print quality cleaning the ADF parts 234 cleaning the printhead lenses 236 cleaning the scanner glass 233 print quality troubleshooting black streaks on a page 304 blank pages 301 characters have jagged edges 295 clipped images 295 fine horizontal lines 295 gray background on prints 297 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 298 poor transparency quality 307 print irregularities 299 print is too dark 300 print is too light 300 repeating print defects 302 shadow images appear on prints 296 skewed print 303 solid color or black pages appear on prints 303 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 305 streaked vertical lines 305 toner fog or background shading 306 toner rubs off 306 toner specks 307 uneven print density 308
299. pears 3 Touch Submit Solving copy problems Copier does not respond These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages Troubleshooting 281 CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears Scanner unit does not close Make sure there are no obstructions 1 Lift the scanner unit 2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open 3 Lower the scanner unit Poor copy quality These are some examples of poor copy quality Blank pages Checkerboard pattern Distorted graphics or pictures Missing characters Faded print Dark print Skewed lines Smudges Streaks Unexpected characters White lines in print Try one or more of the following CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES Check the display and clear any error messages REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE When the print remains faded replace the toner or print cartridge CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS The scanner glass may be dirty Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 233 ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus Troubleshooting 282 MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY Check the quality of the original document PLACE
300. per source for FTP logs Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Log Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies an exit bin for FTP logs Notes Standard Bin is the factory default setting Bin x only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed FTP bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name Note There is an image limitation of 53 characters Custom Job Scanning Off On Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 206 Menu item Description Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses Note On is the factory default setting Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop duri
301. photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass Using the scanner glass Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner Scan or copy documents up to 215 x 355 mm 8 5 x 14 in Copy books up to 25 mm 1 in thick Learning about the printer 13 Understanding the printer control panel 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Item Description 1 Display Lets you view scanning copying faxing and printing options as well as status and error messages 2 Indicator light Off The power is off Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red Operator intervention is needed 3 Sleep Activates Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button Entering or waking from Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is unilluminated Operating in Sleep Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated solid amber Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode The indicator light is illuminated solid green Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber Operating in Hibernate Mode The indicator light is unilluminated Sleep button is blinking amber in pulsing pattern 4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers letters or symbols
302. ppears when at least one optional exit bin is installed E mail Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1 bit images when Color is set to Off Note 8 bit is the factory default setting Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes Note Off is the factory default setting Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Note Off is the factory default setting Allow Save as Shortcut On Off Lets you save e mail addresses as shortcuts Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e mail Destination screen Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Understanding printer menus 202 Menu item Description Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during scanning and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold
303. pplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of supplies from a network computer Note The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Device Status The Device Status page appears displaying a summary of supply levels Maintaining the printer 237 Ordering supplies To order supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions visit the Lexmark Web Site at www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Notes The toner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter or A4 size plain paper Ordering a print cartridge When 88 color cartridge low or 88 color cartridge nearly low appears order a new cartridge Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19798 standard Extremely low print coverage less than 1 25 for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaus
304. printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Reattach the bin 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bin 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin Reattach bin x y Try one or more of the following Turn the printer off and then back on Reattach the specified bins 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Reattach the bins 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bins 1 Turn the printer off 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Contact Customer Support Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins Troubleshooting 268 Remove packaging material area name Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin Remove paper from bin x Remove the paper from the specified bin The printer automatically senses paper removal and r
305. printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available Avoiding jams Paper tray recommendations Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it prior to printing or wait for a prompt to load it Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes Push the tray in firmly after loading paper Paper recommendations Use only recommended paper or specialty media Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper Flex and straighten paper before loading it Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same stack Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam numbers and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location appears on the display Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations To resolve any paper jam message you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path Clearing jams 249 1 2 4 6 5 3 7 Area Jam numbers What to do 1 200 239 Open
306. prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load staples Try one or more of the following Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing Note The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Memory full cannot print faxes There is not enough memory to print the fax job Troubleshooting 267 Touch Continue to clear the message without printing Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn the
307. py It The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected Copying on both sides of the paper duplexing 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 On the home screen touch Copy Copying 99 4 From the Sides Duplex area touch the button for your preferred duplexing method The first number represents sides of the original documents the second number represents sides of the copy For example select 1 sided to 2 sided if you have 1 sided original documents and you want 2 sided copies 5 Touch and then Copy It Reducing or enlarging copies Copies can be reduced to 25 of the original document size or enlarged to 400 of the original document size The factory default setting for Scale is Auto If you leave Scale set to Auto the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying To reduce or enlarge a copy 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparenci
308. r 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Custom x as the paper type Notes Off is the factory default setting Custom x Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Custom Types menu Menu item Description Custom Type x Paper Card Stock Transparency Glossy Rough Cotton Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type x name or a user defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional Notes Paper is the factory default setting The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Recycled Paper Card Stock Transparency Glossy Rough Cotton Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus Notes Paper is the factory default setting The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Custom Names menu Menu item Definition Custom Name x none Specify a custom name for a paper type This n
309. r Top middle All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Top right Top right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the top right of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting for Top right All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Understanding printer menus 184 Menu item Description Header Footer Bottom left Bottom left Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the bottom left of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Bottom middle Bottom middle Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the bottom middle of the page Notes Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle All pages is the factory default setting for Print on Header Footer Bottom right Bottom right Off Date Time Page number Bates number Custom text Print on All pages First page only All but first page Custom text Specifies header footer information for the bottom right of the page Notes
310. r and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time Note Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Maintaining the printer 244 Moving the printer to another location The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options Keep the printer in an upright position Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Maintaining the printer 245 Administrative support Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Using the Embedded Web Server If the printer is installed on a network then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including Viewing a virtu
311. r left corner Partial document or photo scans These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray 1 From the printer control panel check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu 2 Before sending the job to print specify the correct size setting For Windows users specify the size from Print Properties For Macintosh users specify the size from the Page Setup dialog Troubleshooting 285 Cannot scan from a computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages CHECK THE POWER Make sure the printer is plugged in the power is on and Ready appears CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer Solving fax problems Fax and e mail functions are not set up The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e mail To set up fax and e mail follow these steps Note Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network make sure the fax cables are connected 1 From the home screen navigate to gt General Settings gt Run initial setup gt Yes gt Submit 2 Turn the printer off and th
312. r line art Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image Understanding printer menus 199 Menu item Description Content Source Color Laser Inkjet Magazine Press Black White Laser Photo Film Newspaper Other Specifies the source of the document being scanned Notes Color Laser is the factory default setting Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White is used when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer Photo Film is used when the original document is a photo from film Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color Color Gray Specifies whether or not a job prints in grayscale or color Note Color is the factory default setting Resolution 150 200 300 400 600 75 Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch Note 150 is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the outp
313. r off 2 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth with water 3 Open the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 234 4 Remove the pick roller assembly 1 2 5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers 6 Replace the pick roller assembly 1 2 7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover 8 Close the ADF cover Maintaining the printer 235 Cleaning the printhead lenses Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems 1 Open the front door 2 Remove all print cartridges Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum Doing so can damage the photoconductor 3 Locate the four printhead lenses 4 Clean the lenses using compressed air Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printhead lenses 5 Reinstall the print cartridges Maintaining the printer 236 6 Close the front door Storing supplies Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Checking the status of supplies A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Su
314. r prints are on one side or on both sides of the page Note 1 sided is the factory default setting Staple Off On Specifies whether prints are stapled Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Understanding printer menus 212 Hole Punch Off On Specifies whether prints have punched holes Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu appears only when a stapler is installed Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a print Notes 3 holes is the US factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting This menu appears only when a puncher is installed Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page Notes Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Specifies the orientation of a multiple page document Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and landscape Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up
315. ransport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemente
316. rd stock 92 labels paper 91 on using envelopes 91 on using letterhead 90 on using transparencies 91 tips on using envelopes 91 tips on using letterhead 90 toner cartridges recycling 67 toner darkness adjusting 87 touch screen buttons 16 transparencies copying on 97 loading 91 loading in multipurpose feeder 74 tips on using 91 using 91 Tray x paper size unsupported 270 tray linking assigning a custom paper type name 78 tray unlinking assigning a custom paper type name 78 trays linking 76 unlinking 77 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 290 cannot open Embedded Web Server 311 checking an unresponsive printer 261 checking an unresponsive scanner 284 FAQ about color printing 308 fax and e mail functions are not set up 286 Scan to Network 290 Index 336 solving basic printer problems 261 troubleshooting copy copier does not respond 281 partial document or photo copies 283 poor copy quality 282 poor scanned image quality 285 scanner unit does not close 282 troubleshooting display display is blank 278 display shows only diamonds 278 troubleshooting fax caller ID is not shown 286 can receive but not send faxes 289 can send but not receive faxes 288 cannot send or receive a fax 287 received fax has poor print quality 289 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 294 troubleshooting print error reading flash drive 278 held jobs do not print 279 incorrect characters p
317. ress Enable DDNS Yes No Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable mDNS Yes No Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address Enable HTTPS Yes No Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting IPv6 menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers Menu item Description Enable IPv6 On Off Enables IPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Auto Configuration On Off Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 On Off Enables DHCPv6 in the printer Note On is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 158 Wireless menu Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings Note This menu is available only for models
318. rint 280 incorrect margins 297 jammed pages are not reprinted 294 job prints from wrong tray 280 job prints on wrong paper 280 jobs do not print 278 Large jobs do not collate 281 multiple language PDF files do not print 278 paper curl 298 paper frequently jams 294 print job takes longer than expected 280 tray linking does not work 280 unexpected page breaks occur 281 troubleshooting print quality black streaks on a page 304 blank pages 301 characters have jagged edges 295 clipped images 295 fine horizontal lines 295 gray background on prints 297 light colored line white line or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 298 poor transparency quality 307 print irregularities 299 print is too dark 300 print is too light 300 repeating print defects 302 shadow images appear on prints 296 skewed print 303 solid color or black pages appear on prints 303 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 305 streaked vertical lines 305 toner fog or background shading 306 toner rubs off 306 toner specks 307 uneven print density 308 white streaks on a page 304 troubleshooting printer options 2 000 sheet drawer problems 292 cannot detect flash memory card 292 cannot detect printer hard disk 292 internal print server 293 Internal Solutions Port 292 memory card 293 option does not work 291 paper tray problems 291 USB parallel interface card 293 troubleshooting scan cannot scan from a computer 286 partial document or photo sc
319. rk your copies will turn out in relation to the original document Sides Duplex Use this option to select duplex settings You can print copies on one or two sides make two sided copies duplex of two sided original documents make two sided copies from one sided original documents or make one sided copies simplex from two sided original documents Collate This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document The factory default setting for Collate is on the output pages of your copies will be ordered 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If you want all the copies of each page to remain together turn Collate off and your copies will be ordered 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Content This option lets you set the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black W
320. rms and letterhead Use grain long for 60 to 90 g m2 16 to 24 lb weight paper Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not When in doubt contact the paper supplier Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190 C 374 F without melting or releasing hazardous emissions Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content Temperature and humidit
321. rpose feeder 74 lock security 26 M making copies using paper from selected tray 98 memory types installed on printer 230 memory card installing 30 troubleshooting 293 Memory full cannot print faxes 267 menu settings page printing 47 menus Active NIC 154 AppleTalk 159 Bin Setup 152 Confidential Print 169 Configure MP 144 Copy Settings 181 Custom Bin Names 151 Custom Names 150 Custom Scan Sizes 151 Custom Types 150 Default Source 141 diagram of 138 Disk Wiping 169 Edit Security Setups 167 E mail Settings 198 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup 187 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup 196 Finishing 217 Flash Drive 208 FTP Settings 204 General Settings 172 Help 229 HTML 227 Image 228 IPv6 158 Job Accounting 216 Miscellaneous 168 Network x 154 Network Card 156 Network Reports 156 Paper Loading 148 Paper Size Type 141 Paper Texture 145 Paper Weight 147 Parallel x 162 PCL Emul 224 PDF 223 PostScript 224 Quality 219 Reports 153 Security Audit Log 170 Serial x 164 Set Date Time 171 Setup 214 SMTP Setup menu 166 Standard Network 154 Standard USB 160 Substitute Size 145 Supplies 139 TCP IP 157 Utilities 222 Wireless 159 XPS 223 menus diagram 138 Miscellaneous menu 168 mobile device printing from 88 moving the printer 244 245 moving your printer 10 multipurpose feeder loading 74 My MFP setting up 23 N Network x menu 154 Network Card menu 156 network options 25 Network Reports menu 156 network settings
322. rtrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrai and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Best for content 5 90 Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu setting applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality Note 50 is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 210 Menu item Description Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page Notes On is the factory default setting This menu setting applies to all scan functions Scan Bit Depth 8 bit 1 bit Enables the Text Ph
323. ructions Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Additional setup and instructions for using the printer Selecting and storing paper and specialty media Loading paper Configuring printer settings Viewing and printing documents and photos Setting up and using the printer software Configuring the printer on a network Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are available on the Software and Documentation CD For updates visit our Web site at http support lexmark com Instructions for Connecting the printer to an Ethernet network Troubleshooting printer connection problems Networking Guide Open the Software and Documentation CD and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder From the list of publications click the Networking Guide link Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help Open a printer software program or application and then click Help Click to view context sensitive information Notes Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system Le
324. s Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 67 Loading paper and specialty media This section explains how to load the 550 sheet trays the 2 000 sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder It also includes information about paper orientation setting the Paper Size and Paper Type and linking and unlinking tray
325. s Setting the paper size and type The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt Submit Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal Paper Size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu Then specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper Units of Measure Portrait Width Portrait Height Notes The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 1219 mm 8 5 x 48 in The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm 3 x 5 in and loaded in the multipurpose feeder only 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height gt select the width or height gt Submit Loading paper and specialty media 68 Loading the standard or optional 550 sheet tray The printer has one standard 550
326. s 177 Menu item Description Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Note 120 seconds is the factory default setting Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer Note The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Location Specifies the location of the printer Note The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention Available options for each alarm type are Off Single Continuous Notes Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and Cartridge Alarm Single sounds three quick beeps Off is the factory default setting for Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Timeouts Standby Mode Disabled 1 240 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power state Note 15 is the factory default setting Timeouts Sleep Mode 1 240 min Disabled Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power state Notes 30 min is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times Select
327. s according to the specified Paper Type Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected Linking exit bins Link exit bins to create a single output source The printer automatically uses the next available bin as the output source The standard exit bin holds up to 550 sheets of 20 lb paper If you need additional output capacity you can purchase other optional exit bins Note Not all exit bins support every paper size and type 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Bin Setup 2 Touch the bin or bins you want to link and then touch Configure Bins gt Link Creating a custom name for a paper type If the printer is on a network you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type x for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Loading paper and specialty media 77 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Name gt type a name gt Submit Note This custom name will replace the Custom Type x name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus 3 Click Custom Types gt sel
328. s from a newspaper Press Use when the original document was printed using a printing press Other Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Darkness This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document Scanning to a computer or flash drive 136 Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Use this to specify if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e mail Orientation Use this to specify the orientation of the original document and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation Binding Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge of the page Scan Preview This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e mail When the first page is scanned the scanning is paused and a preview image appears Advanced Options Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings ADF Skew Fix Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image Advanced Imaging Use this to change or adjust Background Removal Color Balance Color Dropout Contrast JPEG Quality Mirror Image Negative Image Scan Edge to Edge Shad
329. s provided free by Adobe at www adobe com Secure PDF Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access TIFF Use this to create multiple files or a single file If Multi page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server then TIFF saves one page in each file The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG E mailing 111 JPEG Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs XPS Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification XPS file with multiple pages viewable using an Internet Explorer hosted viewer and the NET Framework or by downloading a third party standalone viewer 5 Touch E mail It Note If you selected Secure PDF you will be prompted to enter your password twice Canceling an e mail When using the ADF touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears When using the scanner glass touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears or while Scan the Next Page Finish the Job appears Understanding e mail options Recipients This option lets you enter the destination of your e mail You may enter multiple e mail addresses Subject This option lets you enter a subject line for your e mail Message This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment File Name This option lets you
330. scription Plain Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Card Stock Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded Notes Normal is the factory default setting Settings appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Recycled Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Glossy Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Weight Heavy Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded Note Heavy is the factory default setting Labels Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Bond Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Envelope Weight Normal Heavy Light Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded Note Normal
331. sed when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer Color On Off Specifies whether or not copies are printed in color Note On is the factory default setting Resolution 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 75 dpi Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch dpi Note 150 dpi is the factory default setting Darkness 1 9 Lightens or darkens the output Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 209 Menu item Description Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the original document Note Letter is the US factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page Notes Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for po
332. side door and then remove the jammed paper 2 24x Open side door of the specified tray and then remove the jammed paper 3 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and then remove the jammed paper 4 280 289 Remove all paper from the ADF and then remove the jammed paper 290 292 Close the ADF cover 5 400 403 460 461 Open the paper transport unit door and then remove the jammed paper 6 431 438 Push the button to slide the finisher to the right open the finisher door and then remove the jammed paper 7 455 Open staple door remove the staple cartridge and then remove the jammed staple Clearing jams 250 200 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared 201 paper jam 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 Determine where the jam is located and then remove it a If paper is inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door 1 2 b Firmly grasp
333. sing the Embedded Web Server 21 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 21 exterior of the printer cleaning 233 e mail canceling 112 e mail alerts low supply levels 247 paper jam 247 setting up 247 e mail function setting up 108 e mail screen advanced options 114 options 112 113 114 E mail Settings menu 198 e mail shortcuts creating using the Embedded Web Server 109 e mail sending using a shortcut number 110 using the address book 110 using the touch screen 110 e mailing adding message line 111 adding subject line 111 changing output file type 111 configuring e mail settings 108 creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 109 creating shortcuts using the touch screen 109 setting up e mail function 108 using a shortcut number 110 using the address book 110 using the touch screen 110 F factory defaults restoring 248 FAQ about color printing 308 fax and e mail functions setting up 286 fax and e mail functions are not set up 286 fax connection connecting the printer to the wall jack 116 connecting to a DSL line 117 connecting to a PBX or ISDN 117 fax connections regional adapters 118 fax log viewing 124 Fax Mode Analog Fax Setup menu 187 Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu 196 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 264 fax screen advanced options 126 options 125 126 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 264 Fax Station
334. skaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International I
335. ss or press and then enter the shortcut number To enter additional recipients touch Next Address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add Note You can also enter an e mail address using the address book 5 Touch Done gt Send It Sending an e mail using a shortcut number 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 Press enter the shortcut number using the keypad and then touch To enter additional recipients touch Next address and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add 4 Touch Send It Sending an e mail using the address book 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient s gt gt enter the name of recipient gt Browse shortcuts E mailing 110 4 Touch the name of the recipients To enter
336. st for Content 5 90 Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size but the quality of the image is lessened 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Text Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 75 is the factory default setting Photo Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image Note 50 is the factory default setting Use Multi Page TIFF On Off Provides a choice between single page TIFF files and multiple page TIFF files For a multiple page scan to FTP job either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job Notes On is the factory default setting This menu item applies to all scan functions Transmission Log Print log Do not print log Print only for error Specifies whether the transmission log prints Note Print log is the factory default setting Log Paper Source Tray x Manual Feeder Specifies a pa
337. stall an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated and certified by UL Underwriter s Laboratories another NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory or a recognized safety certification body in the country region of use This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device including fax machines to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business other entity or individual The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The t
338. stall the printer driver a Obtain a copy of the software installer package From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer From our Web site Go to http support lexmark com and then navigate to SUPPORT amp DOWNLOAD gt select your printer gt select your operating system b Double click the software installer package Wait for the installation dialog to appear If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear then do the following In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Apps list gt Run gt type D setup exe gt OK In Windows 7 or earlier 1 Click or click Start and then click Run 2 In the Start Search or Run dialog type D setup exe 3 Press Enter or click OK Note D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive c Click Install d Follow the instructions on the computer screen e Select Advanced and then click Continue f From the Configure Printer Connection dialog select a port g If the port is not in the list then click Refresh or navigate to Add port gt select a port type gt enter the necessary information gt OK h Click Continue gt Finish 3 Set the COM port parameters After installing the printer driver set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver Note Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer a Open Device Man
339. status shows Connected If the status is Not Connected then check the network cables and then try printing the network setup page again Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB SERIAL OR ETHERNET CABLE For more information visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer Confidential and other held jobs do not print These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following PARTIAL JOB NO JOB OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data Delete the print job and then print it again For PDF documents recreate the PDF and then print it again If you are printing from the Internet then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one For Windows users open Print Properties From the Print and Hold dialog select the Keep duplicate documents check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number For Macintosh users save each print job naming each job differently and then send the individual jobs to the
340. stcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Resolution area touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want 5 Touch Fax It Making a fax lighter or darker 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options 4 From the Darkness area touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax 5 Touch Fax It Sending a fax at a scheduled time 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides 3 From the home screen navigate to Fax gt enter the fax number gt Options gt A
341. t 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower III 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK esky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Notices 323 Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC 1999 5 English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
342. t OK gt OK Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds The printer self test failed Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on If Ready does not appear then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support Error message about reading USB drive appears Make sure the flash drive is supported Print jobs do not print Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER From the printer control panel check the status If necessary follow the recovery instructions MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY Load paper in the tray Troubleshooting 278 MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED Verify that you are using the correct printer software If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network Print a network setup page and check that the
343. t contains mixed paper sizes letter and legal size pages Resolution This option adjusts the output quality of your file Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size Color This option enables or disables color for the scanned image Content This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphics Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphics Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Laser Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo from film Magazine Use when the original document is from a magazine Newspaper Use when the original document i
344. t prints from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Load src with type size Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder Touch Paper loaded continue to clear the message and continue printing If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size it feeds from the default paper source Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 266 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not prompt paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray Cancel the print job Load Manual Feeder with custom string Try one or more of the following Load the specified paper in the manual feeder Touch Prompt each page paper loaded or Do not
345. t successful 284 scanner unit does not close 282 scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 284 ScanBack Utility using 135 scanner Automatic Document Feeder ADF 13 functions 12 scanner glass 13 Scanner automatic feeder cover open 269 scanner glass cleaning 233 scanner glass flatbed copying using 97 scanning from a flash drive 135 quick copy 96 to a computer 134 to an FTP address 129 to an FTP using address book 130 scanning to a computer 134 scanning to a flash drive 135 scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 130 using shortcut numbers 129 using the address book 130 Index 335 using the touch screen 129 Security Audit Log menu 170 security lock 26 sending a fax 121 sending a fax using shortcuts 122 sending a fax using the touch screen 121 sending fax using shortcuts 122 using the address book 122 sending fax at a scheduled time 123 sending fax using the address book 122 Serial x menu 164 serial printing setting up 59 Set Date Time menu 171 setting TCP IP address 157 setting the fax number or station number 119 setting the outgoing fax name or station name 119 setting the paper size 68 setting the paper type 68 setting the Universal paper size 68 setting up e mail alerts using the Embedded Web Server 247 setting up fax and e mail functions 286 setting up serial printing 59 setting up the printer on an Ethernet network Macintosh only 55 on an Ethernet network Windo
346. t to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Notices 317 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC and 2006 95 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within
347. t user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair
348. table stock and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi 172 kPa pressure without delaminating oozing around the edges or releasing hazardous fumes Do not use labels with slick backing material Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the printer and cartridge warranties Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Do not print within 1 mm 0 04 in of the edge of the label of the perforations or between die cuts of the label Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm 0 04 in away from edges is recommended Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible remove a 1 6 mm 0 06 in strip on the leading and driver edge and use a non oozing adhesive Portrait orientation works best especially when printing bar codes Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly impact print quality Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities When printing on card stock Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting Be
349. ter hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or memory Understanding printer menus 222 Menu item Description Format Flash Yes No Formats the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory No cancels the format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete Removes downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and ch
350. the PSTN Notices 320 Using this product in Switzerland This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877 to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland The Lexmark filter must be used as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse Cet appareil n cessite l utilisation d un filtre de tonalit de facturation suisse n de r f rence Lexmark 14B5109 ou 80D1877 devant tre install sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse Ce filtre doit tre utilis pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes t l phoniques suisses Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz F r dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Z hlzeichen bertragung Lexmark Teilenummer 14B5109 oder 80D1877 f r jede Leitung installiert werden ber die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte bertragen werden Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind Uso del prodotto in Svizzera Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877 da installare su tutte le linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poich gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera
351. the factory default setting for Display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Home screen customization Change Language Copy Copy shortcuts Fax Fax Shortcuts E mail E mail Shortcuts FTP FTP Shortcuts Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Solutions Bookmarks Jobs by user Forms and Favorites Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen Available options Do not display Display Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Specifies the format for the printer date Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Specifies the format for the printer time Screen Brightness 20 100 Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen Understanding printer menus 176 Menu item Description One Page Copy Off On Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time Note Off is the factory default setting Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode Off Dim Bright Sleep Mode Off Dim Bright Sets the amount of light from the standard bin Notes Dim is the factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Bright is the factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode if Eco Mode is set to Off or Paper Off is the factory default setting for Sleep Mode if Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper Dim is the factory default setting for Slee
352. the fax scan resolution if possible REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded replace the cartridge MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note If you do not know the IP address of the printer then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt Fax Settings gt Analog Fax Setup Troubleshooting 289 3 In the Max Speed box click one of the following 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 4 Click Submit Solving home screen applications problems An application error has occurred CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS 1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer then you can View the information on the printer control panel home screen or in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings or Configuration 3 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF gt System tab gt Log 4 From the Filter menu select an application status 5 From the Application menu select an application and then click Submit MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREAD
353. the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the side door of the printer 4 From the printer control panel touch Continue jam cleared Clearing jams 251 202 203 paper jams If paper is visible in the standard exit bin then firmly grasp the paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Paper jam in the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible inside the fuser unit then open the fuser access door 1 2 3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the center of the fuser unit Doing so will damage the fuser Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 4 Close the side door Clearing jams 252 Paper jam under the fuser 1 Open the side door of the printer CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 2 If paper is visible under the fuser then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note
354. tified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 Minimize paper consumption 2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices 3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m2 certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indi
355. ting Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the network address information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Understanding printer menus 163 Menu item Description ENA gateway yyy yyy yyy yyy Sets the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Serial x menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regard
356. tings 3 Under Other Settings click Manage Shortcuts Note A password may be required If you do not have an ID and password get one from your system support person 4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup 5 Enter the appropriate information 6 Enter a shortcut number If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 7 Click Add Scanning to an FTP address 130 Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to FTP gt type the FTP address gt gt enter a name for the shortcut gt Done 2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number 3 Touch Submit Understanding FTP options FTP This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination Note Addresses should be in dot notation form for example yyy yyy yyy yyy File Name This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document Original Size This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting The FTP screen appears with the new setting displayed When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes you can scan an original document that contai
357. tion For more information see Updating available options in the printer driver on page 49 Paper tray problems Try one or more of the following MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY 1 Open the paper tray 2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds 3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper 4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly RESET THE PRINTER Turn the printer off wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer on Troubleshooting 291 MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed Reinstall the paper tray For more information see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray or go to http support lexmark com to view the paper tray instruction sheet 2 000 sheet drawer problems CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION Make sure the 2 000 sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer LOAD PAPER If the tray is empty then load paper in the tray or feeder CLEAR ANY JAMS Open the side door of the tray or feeder and then remove any jammed paper AVOID PAPER JAMS Flex the paper Make sure the drawer is properly installed Make sure paper is loaded correctly Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray Make sure the paper or specialty med
358. tion The application lets you customize your touch screen settings and store those preferences in a flash drive Each time you want to copy fax or scan insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer All your personal preferences are automatically uploaded including job settings home screen preferences and address book Note The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of the printer To set up My MFP insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer and then follow the instructions on the printer display to run the setup wizard To use My MFP insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy fax or scan Understanding WS Scan A WS Scan icon and its description Icon Description The Web Services Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer and then send the scanned image to your computer WS Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows based application To learn more about WS Scan see the Microsoft documentation Note The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the network printer The computer must have either Windows 8 Windows 7 or Windows Vista operating system installed Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application shows the printer control panel on your co
359. tion of toner Recommended print cartridge and part number Part name Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge Cyan Print Cartridge Cyan Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792A1CG C792X1CG C792A2CG C792X2CG Magenta Print Cartridge Magenta Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792A1MG C792X1MG C792A2MG C792X2MG Yellow Print Cartridge Yellow Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792A1YG C792X1YG C792A2YG C792X2YG Black Print Cartridge Black Extra High Yield Print Cartridge C792A1KG C792X1KG C792A2KG C792X2KG Ordering a fuser or a transfer module When 80 Fuser Life Warning or 83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears order a replacement fuser or a transfer module When 80 Replace Fuser or 83 Replace Transfer Module appears install the new fuser or the new transfer module For installation information see the documentation that came with the part Part name Part number Fuser 40X7102 100 volts 40X7100 115 volts 40X7101 230 volts Transfer Module 40X7103 Maintaining the printer 238 Ordering a waste toner bottle When 82 Waste toner bottle nearly full appears order a replacement waste toner bottle When 82 Replace waste toner bottle appears replace the waste toner bottle Note Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended Part name Part number Waste toner bottle C792X77G Ordering staple cartridges When Staples Low or Staples Empty appears
360. to the USB port The USB Drive home screen appears Printing 88 Notes If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device A loss of data can occur 2 From the printer control panel touch Print from USB and then select the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print and then touch Print Notes Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs Printing 89 Supported flash drives and file types Flash drive File type Lexar JumpDrive 2 0 Pro 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes SanDisk Cruzer Mini 256MB 512MB or 1GB sizes Notes Hi Speed USB flash drives must support the Full Speed standard Devices supporting only USB low speed capabilities are
361. tory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Sets the portrait width Notes If the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed 8 5 inches is the US factory default setting 216 mm is the international factory default setting The width can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Understanding printer menus 151 Menu item Description Portrait Height 3 48 inches 76 1219 mm Sets the portrait height Notes If the height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the US factory default setting 356 mm is the international factory default setting The height can be increased in 0 01 inch or in 1 mm increments Feed Direction Short Edge Long Edge Specifies the feed direction Notes Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray Bin Setup menu Menu item Description Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Specifies the default exit bin Note Standard Bin is the factory default setting Configure Bins Mailbox Link Mail Overflow Link Optional Type Assignment Specifies configuration options for exit bins Notes Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox
362. trical equipment plugged into the outlet is working Once you have checked each of these possibilities turn the printer off and then back on This often fixes the problem with the scanner Scan was not successful These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM Turn off and then restart the computer Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING Close all programs not being used Troubleshooting 284 THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH Select a lower scan resolution Poor scanned image quality These are possible solutions Try one or more of the following CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES Clear any error messages THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY Clean the scanner glass with a clean lint free cloth dampened with water For more information see Cleaning the scanner glass on page 233 ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the uppe
363. tterhead Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Preprinted Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Colored Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Light Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Heavy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Rough Cotton Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 149 Menu item Description Custom x Loading Off Duplex Determines whethe
364. tting A sound is issued until the fax connection is made Always On turns the speaker on Always Off turns the speaker off Speaker Volume High Low Controls the volume setting Note High is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 195 Menu item Description Ringer Volume On Off Controls the fax speaker ringer volume Note On is the factory default setting Answer On Menu item Description All Rings Single Ring Only Double Ring Only Triple Ring Only Single or Double Rings Only Single or Triple Rings Only Double or Triple Rings Only Specifies ring patterns when device is answering calls Note All Rings is the factory default setting Fax Mode Fax Server Setup menu Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission Fax Server Setup Menu item Description To Format Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen Reply Address Subject Message SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information Secondary SMTP Gateway Image Format PDF pdf XPS xps TIFF tif Specifies the image type for scan to fax Understanding printer menus 196 Menu item Description Content Type Text Text Photo Graphics Photo Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax Notes Text is the factory default setting Text is used when the conte
365. ttings gt Home screen customization A list of basic printer functions appears 2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Cleared check box items are hidden 3 Click Submit Setting up and using the home screen applications 20 Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one or more additional printers Exporting a configuration 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings or Configuration 2 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 3 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure gt Export 5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file and then enter a unique file name or use the default name Note If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved Importing a configuration 1 From the Embedded Web Server click Settings or Configuration 2 Click Device Solutions gt Solutions eSF or click Embedded Solutions 3 From Installed Solutions click the name of the application you want to configure 4 Click Configure gt Import 5 Browse to the saved configuration file and then load or preview it Note If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refr
366. twork setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 In the Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears and then select a setting 3 Touch Submit Minimizing your printer s environmental impact 65 Setting the standard exit bin light To save energy you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin Available settings are Off Dim and Bright The factory default setting for Normal Standby Mode is Bright When Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper then the light setting is Dim When in Sleep Mode then the light is off Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Output Lighting 3 From the Normal Standby Mode list select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby mode 4 Click Submit Using the pri
367. type Note Off is the factory default setting Notes Duplex sets the printer default to 2 sided printing for every print job unless 1 sided printing is selected from Print Properties If Duplex is selected then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit including 1 sided print jobs Understanding printer menus 148 Menu item Description Recycled Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Glossy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Heavy Glossy Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Vinyl Labels Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Bond Loading Off Duplex Determines whether 2 sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper type Note Off is the factory default setting Le
368. u are entering multiple addresses then separate each address with a comma 5 Select the scan settings Format Content Color and Resolution 6 Enter a shortcut number and then click Add If you enter a number that is already in use then you are prompted to select another number Creating an e mail shortcut using the touch screen 1 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient gt type an e mail address To create a group of recipients touch Next address and then type the next recipient s e mail address 2 Touch 3 Type a unique name for the shortcut and then touch Done 4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct and then touch OK If the name or number is incorrect then touch Cancel and then reenter the information E mailing 109 E mailing a document Sending an e mail using the touch screen 1 Load an original document faceup short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass Note Do not load postcards photos small items transparencies photo paper or thin media such as magazine clippings into the ADF Place these items on the scanner glass 2 If you are loading a document into the ADF then adjust the paper guides Note Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image 3 From the home screen navigate to E mail gt Recipient 4 Enter the e mail addre
369. ulse Understanding printer menus 191 Menu item Description Max Speed 2400 4800 9600 14400 33600 Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent Custom Job scanning Off On Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file Scan Preview Off On Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs Background Removal 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy Note 0 is the factory default setting Color Balance Cyan Red Magenta Green Yellow Blue Enables an equal balance of colors in the output Color Dropout Color Dropout None Red Green Blue Default Red Threshold 0 255 Default Green Threshold 0 255 Default Blue Threshold 0 255 Specifies which color to drop during faxing and how much to increase or decrease the dropout Notes None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold Contrast Best for content 0 5 Specifies the contrast of the output Note Best for content is the factory default setting Mirror Image Off On Creates a mirror image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Negative Image Off On Creates a negative image of the original document Note Off is the factory default setting Shadow Detail 4 to 4 Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax Note 0 is th
370. ument Page Setup This option lets you change the Sides Duplex Orientation and Binding Sides Duplex Specifies if the original document is simplex printed on one page or duplex printed on both sides This also identifies what needs to be scanned Orientation Specifies the orientation of the original document and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation Binding Specifies if the original document is bound on the long edge or short edge side Content This option tells the printer the original document type and source Choose content type from Text Text Photo Photo or Graphic Text Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art Graphic Use when the original document is mostly business type graphics such as pie charts bar charts and animations Text Photo Use when the original document is a mixture of text graphics and photos Photo Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image Choose content source from Color Laser Black White Laser Inkjet Photo Film Magazine Newspaper Press or Other Color Laser Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer Black White Use when the original document was printed using a black white laser printer Inkjet Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer Photo Film Use when the original document is a photo
371. ut Note 5 is the factory default setting Orientation Portrait Landscape Specifies the orientation of the scanned image Note Portrait is the factory default setting Understanding printer menus 200 Menu item Description Original Size Letter Legal Executive Folio Statement Universal 4 x 6 in 3 x 5 in Business Card Custom Scan Size x A4 A5 Oficio Mexico A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 Book Original Auto Size Sense Mixed Sizes Specifies the paper size of the document being scanned Notes A4 is the international factory default setting Letter is the US factory default setting Sides Duplex Off Long edge Short edge Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page Notes Off is the factory default setting Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape JPEG Quality Best for Content 5 90 Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image Notes Best for content is the factory default setting 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image 90 provides the best image quality but the file size is very large This menu item applies to all scan functions Text Default 5 90 Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file
372. utes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 3 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down and 6 MNO while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears Once the printer is fully powered up the touch screen displays a list of functions instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen Notes Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back and then Exit Config Menu The printer will power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Securing the memory before moving the printer 232 Maintaining the printer Cleaning the exterior of the printer 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electric
373. uts FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer Print Fonts Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer Print Directory Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working Asset Report Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Menu item Description Active NIC Auto list of available network cards Notes Auto is the factory default setting This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed Standard Network or Network x menus Note Only active ports appear in this menu all inactive ports are omitted Understanding printer menus 154 Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartS
374. vironment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 135 g m2 16 36 lb bond paper grain long paper is recommended For papers heavier than 135 g m2 grain short is recommended Paper and specialty media guidelines 79 Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid jams and poor print quality Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended print side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same source mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted fo
375. w 277 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 276 Adjusting color 261 an error has occurred with the USB drive 261 Change paper source to custom string 262 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 262 Change paper source to custom type name 261 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 262 Change paper source to paper size paper type 262 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 262 Close tray door 263 Close finisher side door 263 Close finisher top cover 263 Close front door 263 Close left side door 263 Close paper transport cover 262 Close top access cover 263 Disk corrupted 263 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 263 Disk problem 263 Empty the hole punch box 264 Fax partition inoperative Contact system administrator 264 Fax server To Format not set up Contact system administrator 264 Fax Station Name not set up 264 Fax Station Number not set up 264 Insert hole punch box 265 Insert staple cartridge 265 Insert Tray x 265 Install bin x 265 Install envelope feeder 265 Install Tray x 265 Load src with custom string 266 Load src with custom type name 266 Load src with size 266 Load src with type size 266 Load Manual Feeder with custom string 267 Load Manual Feeder with custom type name 267 Load Manual Feeder with paper size 267 Load Manual Feeder with paper type paper size 267 Load staples 2
376. witch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes On is the factory default setting When Off is used the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Auto Off Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes Auto is the factory default setting Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Sets the size of the network input buffer Notes Auto is the factory default setting The value can be changed in 1 KB increments The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers Changing this setting from the printer control p
377. ws only 55 Setup menu 214 shadow images appear on prints 296 shipping the printer 245 shortcuts creating e mail 109 fax destination 120 121 FTP address 131 FTP destination 130 showing icons on the home screen 20 Sleep Mode adjusting 64 Slide finisher to the left 269 SMTP Setup menu 166 solid color or black pages appear on prints 303 Some held jobs were not restored 269 standard exit bin lighting setting 66 Standard Network menu 154 standard tray loading 69 Standard USB menu 160 staple cartridges ordering 239 staple jam clearing 455 staple jam 258 statement of volatility 230 status of supplies checking 237 storing paper 82 supplies 237 storing print jobs 92 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 305 streaks appear on a page 304 subject and message information adding to e mail 111 Substitute Size menu 145 supplies checking status 237 checking from printer control panel 237 checking using the Embedded Web Server 237 conserving 62 storing 237 using recycled paper 62 Supplies menu 139 supplies ordering ADF kit 239 cleaning kit 239 fuser or transfer module 238 print cartridges 238 staple cartridges 239 waste toner bottle 239 Supply needed to complete job 269 supported flash drives 90 supported paper sizes 82 supported paper types and weights 84 system board accessing 27 system board cover attaching 27 reattaching 27 T TCP IP menu 157 telecommunication notices 318 319 320 321 tips ca
378. x color cartridge low 277 88 xx color cartridge nearly low 276 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 20 accessing the system board 27 Active NIC menu 154 adding a date and time stamp 103 ADF copying using 96 ADF kit ordering 239 ADF parts cleaning 234 Adjusting color 261 adjusting copy quality 100 adjusting Sleep Mode 64 adjusting toner darkness 87 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 246 advanced options touch screen copy 106 fax 126 FTP 133 AppleTalk menu 159 assigning a custom paper type name 78 attaching cables 46 attaching the system board cover 27 available internal options 25 avoiding paper jams 249 B Bin Setup menu 152 black and white copying 98 black and white printing 87 blank pages 301 blocking junk faxes 124 buttons printer control panel 14 buttons touch screen using 16 C cables Ethernet 46 Index 328 USB 46 canceling print job from computer 94 canceling a print job from a computer 94 from the printer control panel 94 cannot open Embedded Web Server 311 card stock loading in multipurpose feeder 74 tips 92 Change paper source to custom string 262 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 262 Change paper source to custom type name 261 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 262 Change paper source to paper size paper type 262 Change paper source to paper size paper type load orientation 262 checking a
379. x you send If there is a power failure then you may have to reset the date and time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time Faxing 119 3 In the Set Date amp Time field enter the current date and time 4 Click Submit Note It is recommended to use the network time Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time 1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Networks Ports menu Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP IP section 2 Click Security gt Set Date and Time 3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section 4 Click Submit Creating shortcuts Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the
380. y conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer Thickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated Paper and specialty media guidelines 80 Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was iden
381. you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses Note Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi Fi technology It is no longer necessary to configure the network name SSID and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices AppleTalk menu This menu is available from the Network Ports menu Network Ports gt Standard Network or Network x gt Standard Network Setup or Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Understanding printer menus 159 Menu item Description Activate Yes No Activates AppleTalk support Note Yes is the factory default setting View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk name Note The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk address Note The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone default list of zones available on the network Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network Note When default is selected the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the router identifies as the default zone for the network If no default zone exists then the zone marked with an is the default setting Standard USB menu Menu item Description PCL SmartSwitch On Off Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a
382. ze of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Job Buffering Off On Auto Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol DTR DTR DSR XON XOFF XON XOFF DTR XONXOFF DTRDSR Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port Notes DTR is the factory default setting DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Off On Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computer Notes Off is the factory default setting This menu item applies only to the serial port if Seri
383. zes copying 99 Index 329 directory list printing 94 disk wiping 231 Disk Wiping menu 169 display troubleshooting display is blank 278 display shows only diamonds 278 display printer control panel 14 adjusting brightness 65 disposing of printer hard disk 230 distinctive ring service fax connecting to 118 documents printing from Macintosh 87 from Windows 87 duplexing 99 E Eco Mode setting 63 Edit Security Setups menu 167 Embedded Web Server accessing 20 246 administrator settings 246 checking printer status 246 checking supplies 237 creating a fax destination shortcut 120 creating an FTP shortcut 130 creating e mail shortcuts 109 functions 246 initial fax setup 115 networking settings 246 problem accessing 311 setting up e mail alerts 247 using 246 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 246 emission notices 314 315 318 322 323 Empty the hole punch box 264 encrypting the printer hard disk 232 enlarging a copy 100 envelopes loading in multipurpose feeder 74 tips on using 91 environmental settings brightness adjusting 65 conserving supplies 62 Hibernate Mode 65 Quiet Mode 63 Sleep Mode 64 standard exit bin lighting 66 erasing hard disk memory 231 erasing non volatile memory 231 erasing volatile memory 230 Ethernet network setup using Macintosh 55 using Windows 55 Ethernet networking Macintosh 55 Windows 55 Ethernet port 46 exit bins linking 77 exporting a configuration u

Lexmark 47B1002 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents